AP Exam Instructions 2016

AP Exam Instructions 2016
2015-16
EXAM
DATES
MAY 2–6 | MAY 9–13
MAY 18–20 (Late Testing)
2015-16 AP Exam Instructions
®
About the College Board
The College Board is a mission-driven not-for-profit
organization that connects students to college success
and opportunity. Founded in 1900, the College Board
was created to expand access to higher education.
Today, the membership association is made up of over
6,000 of the world’s leading educational institutions
and is dedicated to promoting excellence and equity
in education. Each year, the College Board helps more
than seven million students prepare for a successful
transition to college through programs and services
in college readiness and college success — including
the SAT® and the Advanced Placement Program® . The
organization also serves the education community
through research and advocacy on behalf of students,
educators, and schools.
For further information, visit www.collegeboard.org.
AP Equity and Access Policy
®
The College Board strongly encourages educators
to make equitable access a guiding principle
for their AP® programs by giving all willing and
academically prepared students the opportunity
to participate in AP. We encourage the elimination
of barriers that restrict access to AP for students
from ethnic, racial, and socioeconomic groups
that have been traditionally underserved. Schools
should make every effort to ensure their AP classes
reflect the diversity of their student population. The
College Board also believes that all students should
have access to academically challenging course
work before they enroll in AP classes, which can
prepare them for AP success. It is only through a
commitment to equitable preparation and access
that true equity and excellence can be achieved.
© 2016 The College Board. College Board, Advanced
Placement Program, AP, AP Central, SAT, and the acorn
logo are registered trademarks of the College Board. AP
Potential and AP Capstone are trademarks owned by the
College Board. PSAT/NMSQT is a registered trademark
of the College Board and National Merit Scholarship
Corporation. Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. All other products
and services may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Visit the College Board on the Web: www.collegeboard.org.
AP Services for Educators
877-274-6474
(toll free in the United States and Canada)
212-632-1781
Email: apexams@info.collegeboard.org
Email: apexams-intl@info.collegeboard.org
(for educators outside the United States)
Call Center Hours
M-F, 8 a.m. to 7 p.m. ET
April 18 to May 20, 2016, M-F, 7 a.m. to 9 p.m. ET
AP Services for Students
888-225-5427
(toll free in the United States and Canada)
212-632-1780
Email: apstudents@info.collegeboard.org
AP Services
P.O. Box 6671
Princeton, NJ 08541-6671
610-290-8979 (fax)
609-882-4118 (TTY)
For overnight and/or courier mail:
AP Services
1425 Lower Ferry Road
Ewing, NJ 08618-1414
877-274-6474
(toll free in the United States and Canada)
College Board Services
for Students with Disabilities
P.O. Box 6226
Princeton, NJ 08541-6226
844-255-7728
(toll free in the United States and Canada)
212-713-8333
609-882-4118 (TTY)
609-771-7944 (fax)
Email: ssd@info.collegeboard.org
Send eligibility-related mail such as SSD Coordinator
Forms or applications for accommodations to:
College Board SSD
P.O. Box 7504
London, KY 40742-7504
866-360-0114 (fax)
Office of Testing Integrity
P.O. Box 6671
Princeton, NJ 08541-6671
609-406-5427
609-406-5441
609-406-9709 (fax)
Email: tsreturns@ets.org
AP Exam Instructions
TABLE O F CON TE NT S
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sample Answer Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Seating Students for AP Calculus AB, Calculus BC, and United States History Exams . . . . . . . . . 11
General Instructions I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General Instructions II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exam-Specific Instructions
23
30
36
43
49
60
65
71
77
83
88
97
120
142
147
152
157
179
189
194
216
222
228
234
239
261
268
274
280
289
Administration Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Incident Report Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
AP Exam Seating Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Art History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculus (AB/BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chinese Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer Science A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economics (Macroeconomics/Microeconomics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
English Language and Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
English Literature and Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
French Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
German Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Government and Politics: Comparative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Government and Politics: United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Human Geography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Italian Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japanese Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physics 1: Algebra-Based/Physics 2: Algebra-Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physics C: Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanish Language and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanish Literature and Culture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Studio Art . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
United States History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction
Introduction
This AP Exam Instructions book contains the scripts and instructions for administering regularly
scheduled AP Exams and alternate AP Exams for late testing. This book also contains a sample
of a completed answer sheet, a seating plan for exams with scrambled multiple-choice sections,
an Administration Incidents table, a 2016 AP Coordinator’s Incident Report Form, and an AP
Exam Seating Chart template and instructions. Scripts and instructions for individual AP Exam
subjects are available in PDF format at www.collegeboard.org/apexaminstructions.
All exams must be administered on the official testing schedule (see back cover and inside back
cover). Late-testing is only permitted for students affected by the circumstances listed on page 20
of the 2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual. Schools offering late-testing must order alternate exams
— regularly scheduled exams may not be administered on late-testing dates.
All exams, except Chinese Language and Culture, Japanese Language and Culture, and Studio
Art, must begin with either General Instructions I or General Instructions II.
Use General
Instructions I if:
The group has any students who have not completed the purpleshaded areas on pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet this year, either at a
preadministration session or at their first exam.
Use General
Instructions II if:
All students in the group have completed the purple-shaded areas on
pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet this year, either at a preadministration
session or at their first exam.
Do not use General
Instructions I or II
See the exam instructions for Chinese Language and Culture,
Japanese Language and Culture, and Studio Art for details about how
student registration information will be submitted for these exams.
Important Changes for 2015 -1 6
• Music Theory: Students’ sight-singing responses recorded digitally will be submitted
via the Digital Audio Submission (DAS) portal, which will replace submission of
responses on CD. Note: The file naming convention for Music Theory is new this
year. The file name must include the exam form. Student-response tapes will
continue to be an option for submitting students’ responses for the 2016 exam
administration. There will be no changes to the AP Music Theory course or exam.
Visit professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/coordinate for more information.
• Handheld Digital Recording Devices: Additional specifications and clarification on
the use of handheld digital recording devices for recording student audio responses
in the AP Music Theory and AP world language and culture exams are now available.
School-owned devices that meet the acceptable criteria may be used. Learn more at
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital.
• U.S. History: Students’ short-answer booklets will be returned in the U.S. History
short-answer booklet return envelope(s). Please note that for European History, there is
no envelope for students’ short-answer booklets.
2
AP Exam Instructions
• A
rt History: The redesigned course is equivalent to a two-semester introductory
college course and offers teachers the flexibility to tailor instruction to meet the needs
and interests of their students. The course limits the required content to 250 diverse
works of art to promote in-depth learning, underscoring the exam’s focus on assessing
students’ in-depth critical analysis of relationships among works of art, art historical
concepts, and global cultures.
The AP Art History Exam no longer has Parts A and B for Sections I and II. The total
standard time for the exam remains 3 hours, with 1 hour for Section I and 2 hours for
Section II. The Section I booklet will include multiple-choice questions and images.
The exam materials now include an orange booklet for Section II only.
• European History: The redesigned course is structured around the investigation of
five course themes and 19 key concepts in four different chronological periods, from
approximately 1450 to the present. The course allows students to spend more time
learning essential concepts and developing necessary historical thinking skills by
focusing on a limited number of key concepts.
Section I, Part A (Multiple Choice), will be 55 minutes; Section I, Part B (ShortAnswer Questions), will be 50 minutes; Section II (Free Response) will be 1 hour and
30 minutes; and the standard total time for the exam will be 3 hours and 15 minutes.
In the redesigned exam, all multiple-choice questions will be grouped in sets that are
linked to historical source material. There will be new short-answer questions that ask
students to respond to historical source material or historical questions.
• Computer Science A: The multiple-choice section will be 1 hour and 30 minutes, an
increase of 15 minutes from the 2015 exam. The free-response section will be 1 hour and
30 minutes, a decrease of 15 minutes from the 2015 exam. The standard total time for the
exam will remain at 3 hours.
• AP Research: This fall, the AP Research course launched at more than 130 participating
schools worldwide as the second course in the AP Capstone™ program. For more
information about AP Research and AP Capstone, visit www.collegeboard.org/apcapstone.
• Chinese and Japanese Exams on CD: Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Vista are not supported for 2016. The Apple Mac and iMac computer systems are not
supported for 2016. Complete hardware/software and technical configuration requirements
are available on pages 104 and 105 of the 2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual. Note: Microsoft®
Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Enterprise, and Windows 10 Education
are supported operating systems for the 2016 administration of the AP Chinese and Japanese
Exams.
3
Introduction
Completing the Answer Sheet
The identification information that a student supplies each year becomes the basis of his or her
AP record for that year. It is extremely important that students enter this information completely
and correctly on their answer sheets. Chinese, Japanese, and Studio Art exams do not require the
completion of a paper answer sheet — student identification information is entered electronically
in student information/registration screens on exam day.
Page 1
Complete the Blue Section of the Answer Sheet
at EACH Exam Administration
Complete the Purple Sections of the Answer Sheet
ONCE Regardless of the Number of AP Exams Taken
Affix AP Number Label
I. Area Code and Phone Number
Affix AP Exam Label*
J. School You Attend
A. Signature and Date*
K. Date of Birth
B. Legal Name
L. Social Security Number (Optional)
C. Your AP Number
M.College to Receive Your AP Score Report
D. Exam Date*
N. Current Grade Level
E. Exam Start Time*
O. Student Search Service®
F. Multiple-Choice Booklet Serial Number*
G. Online Provider Code (if applicable)*
H. AP Exam I Am Taking Using this Answer Sheet*
Page 2
P. Survey Questions*
Q. Language Questions (if applicable)*
Page 4
R. Your Mailing Address
S. For Students Outside the United States Only
T. Student Identifier (Student ID Number)
U. Email Address
V.Sex
W.Which Language Do You Know Best?
X. Racial/Ethnic Group**
Y. Parental Education Level
* Students must fill out these areas at the time of the exam administration only, and not during a
preadministration session.
** Item X., Racial/Ethnic Group, is different this year. There are now two questions instead of one.
Students who identify with multiple races and ethnic groups may mark all choices that apply to them.
See Item X on page 10 for an example of how to mark more than one choice.
Preadministration Sessions
We strongly encourage you to hold a preadministration session, in which students complete
identifying information on their first, or registration, answer sheets. This can save you and your
students 30 minutes or more on exam day. A PowerPoint presentation designed to assist you with
holding a preadministration session is available at www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
Detailed information about holding a preadministration session, including a script, is available in
a separate booklet included in the coordinator’s packet that is part of preadministration materials
and regularly scheduled exam materials shipments. A PDF copy of the booklet is available at
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
4
AP Exam Instructions
Please note:
• A
preadministration session saves time only if everyone who is taking the exam
participates. Exams cannot begin until everyone has completely filled in his or her
identification information, so if there are some students who did not participate in the
preadministration session, everyone will have to wait until they have finished before starting
the exam. Therefore, it may be necessary to conduct more than one preadministration session
if all students testing are not present at the initial session.
• Preadministration materials are not available for late testing, for students using large-block
answer sheets, or for schools that order fewer than 20 exams, and a preadministration session
cannot be conducted for AP Chinese, Japanese, or Studio Art.
T
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
MI
NY
VT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Mother or female guardian
AK
HI
MN
OH
WA
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Father or male guardian
AL
IA
MO
OK
WI
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Grade school
AR
ID
MS
OR
WV
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Some high school
AZ
IL
MT
PA
WY
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
High school diploma or equivalent
CA
IN
NC
RI
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Vocational or trade school
CO
KS
ND
SC
Puerto
Rico
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Some college
CT
KY
NE
SD
AA
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Associate or two-year degree
DC
LA
NH
TN
AE
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Bachelor’s or four-year degree
DE
MA
NJ
TX
AP
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Some graduate or professional school
FL
MD
NM
UT
Other
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
GA
ME
NV
VA
T. STUDENT IDENTIFIER (Student ID Number)
STATE
AP® Preadministration Instructions
2015-16
This booklet contains information about holding an AP preadministration session.
A preadministration session allows students to complete identification information
on the AP answer sheet ahead of time, saving them valuable time on exam day.
In the first column, indicate the highest level of education of
one parent/guardian, and indicate whether this is your mother/
female guardian or father/male guardian. Then, if applicable,
indicate the highest level of education of your other parent/
guardian in the second column, and indicate whether this is
your mother/female guardian or father/male guardian.
nder of your address in the spaces provided.
Graduate or professional degree
1132859829
State or Province
Country
ZIP or Postal Code
n t o n@ g m a i l . c o m
Inside:
⦁ Preadministration script for Coordinators and proctors
⦁ Sample 2016 AP answer sheet
Student Identifiers (Student ID Numbers) and Online Score Reports
Your school, district, or state may assign each student a unique local identifier, commonly
referred to as a student identifier or student ID number. Students have the option to enter this
number in Item T on their answer sheet and then later use it to retrieve their online scores. The
student ID number will be included in selected online score reports for schools and districts to
aid matching of students’ scores in local data and reporting systems.
AP score results for students will be available online in July at apscore.org. Students will not
receive their scores in the mail. The student ID number will make it easier for your students to
retrieve their online scores. When AP students access the system to view their AP Exam scores,
they will be asked to enter either the student ID number they entered on their answer sheet
or their AP number. We strongly encourage you to ask your students to enter their student ID
number, if available, on their answer sheet, to avoid any delay in the students receiving access to
their scores (students often lose or forget their AP number).
5
Introduction
In addition to being a value to students, the student ID number will appear in online score
reports for your school and district in July. (The student ID number will be added to the
Student Datafile, the Student Score Report, the Subject Score Roster, the School Scholar Roster,
and the School Score Roster.) The student ID number will help match students’ scores in
reporting systems.
If your students have student ID numbers, here is a suggested checklist to help ensure this field is
completed on exam day:
❏Inform students about this answer sheet item and how it can help them access their online
scores in July. For students who have multiple ID numbers:
❏Make a determination on a school or district level as to which student ID number the
student should use.
❏Tell students where they can find this student ID number before exam day, and assist
any students who do not know their student ID number or are unsure which student ID
number to use.
❏Encourage students to enter their student ID number accurately on their “registration” answer
sheet, either at a preadministration session or at their first 2016 AP Exam.
❏Remind students they may use their student ID number as an alternative to their AP number
to access the student online score reporting system in July.
Important Reminders
Scores will be available to students online at apscore.org in July. In order to access and send
their scores, and to avoid any score reporting delays, students must:
• Enter identifying information (particularly name, date of birth, sex, mailing address,
and email address) carefully and consistently on AP answer sheets, and make sure that
information is also consistent with their College Board account.
• C
reate a College Board account (students may already have an account if they accessed
AP Exam scores online last year, registered for the SAT®, or participated in other College
Board programs).
• Provide their AP number or student ID number (if they entered one on their answer sheet)
when accessing their scores at apscore.org.
Students should use the same information on their College Board account and their AP answer
sheet(s). Mismatched names, dates of birth, email addresses, and other incomplete/inconsistent
information can delay access to scores.
6
(from Student Pack)
S
T
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
K
L
76
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Z
–
V
W
X
Y
Z
–
V
Note: Fields A—H are blue on the 2016 AP answer sheet.
W
X
Y
Z
108603-00657 • TF216E4757.5 • Printed in U.S.A.
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
I
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
785208
H. AP EXAM I AM
TAKING USING THIS
ANSWER SHEET
Y
X
W
V
U
T
U
T
U
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
I
J
H
G
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
–
–
Q4068/1-4
1
2
3
4
Section Number
5
6
7
Z
Z
Z
8
Y
Y
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
SCHOOL USE ONLY
Z
Y
X
W
United States History
Exam Name:
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
9
B
0
–
Z
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
4MBP
Form Code:
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
Option 1
2
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Option 2
Fee Reduction Granted
–
Z
Y
X
X
Y
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
Form:
–
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
I
J
I
J
I
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
F
A
F
A
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
L I NDS AY
BR OWNTO N
A
Legal First Name — First 12 Letters
Omit apostrophes, Jr., II.
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
MI
9
8
7
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
S
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
9
8
7
7
5
5
6
4
4
6
3
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
4
5
4
5
9
9
8
7
3
3
7
2
2
6
1
1
6
0
0
8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
USA
Country
CT
State
Kent
City
Kent School
School Name
M. COLLEGE TO RECEIVE YOUR
AP SCORE REPORT
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
07 0 3 3 0
SCHOOL CODE
J. SCHOOL YOU ATTEND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Poughkeepsie
USA
Country
NY
State
City
Vassar College
College Name
in the AP Student Pack,
indicate the ONE college
that you want to receive
your AP score report.
2956
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
000000000
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
COLLEGE CODE Using the college code listed
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
Day
Dec
Nov
Oct
Sep
Aug
Jul
Jun
Year
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No
If you don’t answer and previously chose to
participate in this service, we will continue
providing your information.
Yes
Would you like us to supply your information?
Colleges and scholarship programs may
request your information to inform you of
O. STUDENT SEARCH SERVICE®
12th
No longer in
high school
11th
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2 6 9 9
May 3
Apr
Mar
Feb
Jan
Month
Not yet in
9th grade
9th
10th
2
2
3
1
1
3
0
0
G. ONLINE
PROVIDER
CODE
PAGE 1
K. DATE OF BIRTH
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N. CURRENT
GRADE LEVEL
COMPLETE THIS AREA ONLY ONCE.
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0 430 0 6 525
L. SOCIAL SECURITY
NUMBER (Optional)
INTERNATIONAL PHONE
0
0
9
8
7
6
11
5
5
6
10
4
9
8
6
AM PM
4
3
3
2
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
0
0
06 0555 5555
I. AREA CODE AND
PHONE NUMBER
9
8
7
6
5
5
6
4
3
4
3
2
1
0
2
2
2
1
0
2
5/6/2016
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Date
0
0
F. MULTIPLE-CHOICE BOOKLET
SERIAL NUMBER
7
Sign your legal name as it will appear on your college applications.
0
0
0
E. EXAM
START
TIME
E
L
P
M
A
S
Legal Last Name — First 15 Letters
B. LEGAL NAME
A. SIGNATURE
Day
0 506
Month
D. EXAM DATE
(from Section I Booklet)
AP Exam Label
12
01 8 7 7623
C. YOUR AP NUMBER
B123456789T
USE NO. 2 PENCIL ONLY
To maintain the security of the exam and the validity of my AP score, I will allow no one else to see the multiple-choice questions. I will
seal the multiple-choice booklet when asked to do so, and I will not discuss these questions with anyone at any time after completing the
section. I am aware of and agree to the AP Program’s policies and procedures as outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and
Parents, including using testing accommodations (e.g., extended time, computer, etc.) only if I have been preapproved by College Board
Services for Students with Disabilities.
COMPLETE THIS AREA AT EVERY EXAM.
Answer Sheet
2016
AP Number Label
Sample Answer Sheet — Page 1
Sample Answer Sheet — Page 2
PAGE 2
COMPLETE THIS AREA AT EACH EXAM (IF APPLICABLE).
P. SURVEY QUESTIONS — Answer the survey questions in the AP Student Pack. Do not put responses to exam questions in this section.
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
4
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
5
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
8
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
3
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Q. LANGUAGE — Do not complete this section unless instructed to do so.
If this answer sheet is for the French Language and Culture, German Language and Culture, Italian Language and Culture, Spanish Language
and Culture, or Spanish Literature and Culture Exam, please answer the following questions. Your responses will not affect your score.
2. Do you regularly speak or hear the language at home?
1. Have you lived or studied for one month or more in a country where the language of the
exam you are now taking is spoken?
Yes
No
QUESTIONS 1–75
Yes
No
E
L
P
M
A
S
Indicate your answers to the exam questions in this section (pages 2 and 3). Mark only one response per question
for Questions 1 through 120. If a question has only four answer options, do not mark option E. Answers written in
the multiple-choice booklet will not be scored.
EXAMPLES OF
INCOMPLETE MARKS
COMPLETE MARK
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
You must use a No. 2 pencil and marks must be complete. Do not use a mechanical pencil. It
is very important that you fill in the entire circle darkly and completely. If you change your response,
erase as completely as possible. Incomplete marks or erasures may affect your score.
1
A
B
C
D
E
26
A
B
C
D
E
51
A
B
C
D
E
2
A
B
C
D
E
27
A
B
C
D
E
52
A
B
C
D
E
3
A
B
C
D
E
28
A
B
C
D
E
53
A
B
C
D
E
4
A
B
C
D
E
29
A
B
C
D
E
54
A
B
C
D
E
5
A
B
C
D
E
30
A
B
C
D
E
55
A
B
C
D
E
6
A
B
C
D
E
31
A
B
C
D
E
56
A
B
C
D
E
7
A
B
C
D
E
32
A
B
C
D
E
57
A
B
C
D
E
8
A
B
C
D
E
33
A
B
C
D
E
58
A
B
C
D
E
9
A
B
C
D
E
34
A
B
C
D
E
59
A
B
C
D
E
10
A
B
C
D
E
35
A
B
C
D
E
60
A
B
C
D
E
11
A
B
C
D
E
36
A
B
C
D
E
61
A
B
C
D
E
12
A
B
C
D
E
37
A
B
C
D
E
62
A
B
C
D
E
13
A
B
C
D
E
38
A
B
C
D
E
63
A
B
C
D
E
14
A
B
C
D
E
39
A
B
C
D
E
64
A
B
C
D
E
15
A
B
C
D
E
40
A
B
C
D
E
65
A
B
C
D
E
16
A
B
C
D
E
41
A
B
C
D
E
66
A
B
C
D
E
17
A
B
C
D
E
42
A
B
C
D
E
67
A
B
C
D
E
18
A
B
C
D
E
43
A
B
C
D
E
68
A
B
C
D
E
19
A
B
C
D
E
44
A
B
C
D
E
69
A
B
C
D
E
20
A
B
C
D
E
45
A
B
C
D
E
70
A
B
C
D
E
21
A
B
C
D
E
46
A
B
C
D
E
71
A
B
C
D
E
22
A
B
C
D
E
47
A
B
C
D
E
72
A
B
C
D
E
23
A
B
C
D
E
48
A
B
C
D
E
73
A
B
C
D
E
24
A
B
C
D
E
49
A
B
C
D
E
74
A
B
C
D
E
25
A
B
C
D
E
50
A
B
C
D
E
75
A
B
C
D
E
ETS USE ONLY
Exam
Exam
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SELECTED MEDIA EXAMS
R
W
O
OTHER EXAMS
PT02
TOTAL
PT03
Subscore (if applicable)
PT04
Subscore (if applicable)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Note: Fields P and Q are blue on the 2016 AP answer sheet.
78
R
W
O
Sample Answer Sheet — Page 3
PAGE 3
QUESTIONS 76–120
76
A
B
C
D
E
91
A
B
C
D
E
106
A
B
C
D
E
77
A
B
C
D
E
92
A
B
C
D
E
107
A
B
C
D
E
78
A
B
C
D
E
93
A
B
C
D
E
108
A
B
C
D
E
79
A
B
C
D
E
94
A
B
C
D
E
109
A
B
C
D
E
80
A
B
C
D
E
95
A
B
C
D
E
110
A
B
C
D
E
81
A
B
C
D
E
96
A
B
C
D
E
111
A
B
C
D
E
82
A
B
C
D
E
97
A
B
C
D
E
112
A
B
C
D
E
83
A
B
C
D
E
98
A
B
C
D
E
113
A
B
C
D
E
84
A
B
C
D
E
99
A
B
C
D
E
114
A
B
C
D
E
85
A
B
C
D
E
100
A
B
C
D
E
115
A
B
C
D
E
86
A
B
C
D
E
101
A
B
C
D
E
116
A
B
C
D
E
87
A
B
C
D
E
102
A
B
C
D
E
117
A
B
C
D
E
88
A
B
C
D
E
103
A
B
C
D
E
118
A
B
C
D
E
89
A
B
C
D
E
104
A
B
C
D
E
119
A
B
C
D
E
90
A
B
C
D
E
105
A
B
C
D
E
120
A
B
C
D
E
QUESTIONS 121–126
E
L
P
M
A
S
For Students Taking AP Biology
121
–
122
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
.
–
QUESTIONS 131–142
123
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
124
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
.
125
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
–
.
126
/
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
–
.
/
/
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
–
.
–
For Students Taking AP Physics 1 or AP Physics 2
Mark two responses per question. You will receive credit only if both correct responses are selected.
131
A
B
C
D
135
A
B
C
D
139
A
B
C
132
A
B
C
D
136
A
B
C
D
140
A
B
C
D
133
A
B
C
D
137
A
B
C
D
141
A
B
C
D
134
A
B
C
D
138
A
B
C
D
142
A
B
C
D
D
© 2015 The College Board. College Board, AP, Student Search Service and the acorn logo are registered trademarks of the College Board.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
98
.
/
COMPLETE THIS AREA ONLY ONCE.
9
/
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/
U
V
9 10
W
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/
9
8
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
I
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
O
P
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
U. EMAIL ADDRESS
Address
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
By providing your email address, you are granting the College Board
permission to use your email in accordance with the policies in the
2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
S. FOR STUDENTS OUTSIDE
THE UNITED STATES ONLY
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
I
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
City
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
A
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
STATE
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
A
IA
ID
IL
IN
KS
KY
LA
MA
MD
ME
AL
AR
AZ
CA
CO
CT
DC
DE
FL
GA
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
HI
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
AK
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
P
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
NV
NM
NJ
NH
NE
ND
NC
MT
MS
MO
MN
MI
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
O
M
N
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
VA
UT
TX
TN
SD
SC
RI
PA
OR
OK
OH
NY
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
L
M
L
M
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
C
D
E
C
D
E
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
B
B
F
A
A
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
Country
1 132 8 5 9 8 2 9
T. STUDENT IDENTIFIER (Student ID Number)
Other
AP
AE
AA
6
5
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
K
K
N
I
J
I
J
Puerto
Rico
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
4
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
WY
WV
WI
WA
VT
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
State or Province
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
remainder of your address in the spaces provided.
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
L i n d s a y B r o w n t o n @gm a i l . c o m
/
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
0 675 7
ZIP OR POSTAL CODE
E
L
P
M
A
S
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Z
Y
X
W
V
U
T
T
T
S
R
S
R
Q
N
M
L
K
S
R
P
O
O
P
N
N
Q
M
M
P
L
L
Q
O
K
K
I
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
B
I
J
I
J
I
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
B
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
G
F
E
D
C
A
B
B
H
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
A
F
E
D
C
B
A
F
E
D
C
B
A
E
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
E
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
C
B
A
C
B
A
A
B
B
B
A
A
A
B
A
KE N T
W Y N D H AM
4 0 4
P L A C E
CITY
Use the address abbreviations from your AP Student Pack. Fill in only one circle per column. Indicate a space in your address by leaving a blank box; do not grid that column.
STREET ADDRESS (include street number, street name, apartment number, etc.)
R. YOUR MAILING ADDRESS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Asian (including Indian
subcontinent and
Philippines origin)
Black or African American
(including Africa and
Afro-Caribbean origin)
Native Hawaiian or other
White (including Middle
Eastern origin)
No, not of
Hispanic, Latino,
or Spanish origin
Yes, Cuban
Yes, Mexican
Yes, Puerto Rican
Yes, another
Hispanic, Latino,
or Spanish origin
American Indian or
Alaska Native
What is your race?
(You may mark all that apply.)
Please answer both questions about
Hispanic origin and about race. For the
following questions about your identity,
Hispanic origins are not races.
X. RACIAL/ETHNIC GROUP
English and another language
about the same
Another language
English
b.
Are you of
Hispanic,
Latino, or
Spanish origin?
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Male
W. WHICH LANGUAGE DO YOU
KNOW BEST?
Female
PAGE 4
ZIP or Postal Code
Graduate or professional degree
Some graduate or professional school
Bachelor’s or four-year degree
Associate or two-year degree
Some college
Vocational or trade school
High school diploma or equivalent
Some high school
Grade school
Father or male guardian
Mother or female guardian
one parent/guardian, and indicate whether this is your mother/
female guardian or father/male guardian. Then, if applicable,
indicate the highest level of education of your other parent/
guardian in the second column, and indicate whether this is
your mother/female guardian or father/male guardian.
Y. PARENTAL EDUCATION LEVEL
a.
0
0
COUNTRY
CODE
V. SEX
Sample Answer Sheet — Page 4
Seating for Calculus and U.S. History Exams
AP Exam Instructions
Seating Students for AP Calculus AB, Calculus BC, and
United States History Exams
SEATING POLICY
Testing Window
Exams Administered at Schools in the
United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, and
the U.S. Virgin Islands
Regularly Scheduled
Exams
All AP Exams (except for Calculus AB,
Calculus BC, and U.S. History):
Exams Administered at Schools Outside
the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico,
and the U.S. Virgin Islands
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
Calculus AB, Calculus BC, and U.S. History
exams only:
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
Students must be seated no less than
four feet apart.
Late-Testing Exams
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
SAMPLE OF SEATING PLAN FOR SCRAMBLED MULTIPLE-CHOICE SECTIONS:
CALCULUS AB, CALCULUS BC, AND U.S. HISTORY*
*Directional arrows indicate the alternating distribution pattern that
should be followed when distributing exam materials to students.
*After exams are distributed, confirm that students with the same
multiple-choice section are not seated directly next to, in front of, or
in back of one another. For example, a student with exam form code
4MBP-Q should not be seated directly next to a student with that
same form code. Rearrange students as needed.
REAR
Sample Form Code
Section I booklet
serial number
(last three digits
shown)
Note that your
school’s exam form
codes may not end in
an “-R” suffix.
4MBP-Q
#_112
4MBP-R
#_113
4MBP-Q
#_118
4MBP-R
#_119
4MBP-Q
#_124
4MBP-R
#_111
4MBP-Q
#_114
4MBP-R
#_117
4MBP-Q
#_120
4MBP-R
#_123
4MBP-Q
#_110
4MBP-R
#_115
4MBP-Q
#_116
4MBP-R
#_121
4MBP-Q
#_122
FRONT (students face this direction)
Note that all other exams must follow the standard rule of allowing no less than five feet
(approximately 1.5 meters) between students.
Follow the directions on pages 50 and 51 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
11
SEATING FOR CALCULUS AND U.S. HISTORY EXAMS
The AP Program provides schools with scrambled multiple-choice sections for Calculus AB,
Calculus BC, and U.S. History exams taken on regularly scheduled testing dates at schools in the
United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Scrambling the sections reduces
the risk of students copying from one another, allowing schools to seat students closer together and
test more students in fewer testing rooms.
General Instructions I
General Instructions I
Use these
instructions if:
The group has any students who have not completed the purpleshaded areas on pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet, either at a
preadministration session or at their first exam.
Tip: Before students enter the exam room, check the Student Packs
and answer sheets for the group to determine if any students have
not already completed this information.
Do not use these
instructions if:
All students in the group have completed the purple-shaded areas on
pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet this year — you must use General
Instructions II on page 19.
OR
You are administering the AP Chinese Language and Culture Exam,
the AP Japanese Language and Culture Exam, or the AP Studio Art
portfolio assembly and submission.
When you have a mixed group (some who have filled out the purple-shaded areas on pages 1 and
4 of the answer sheet and some who have not), use General Instructions I; you will be instructing
those who have already filled out their answer sheets to sit quietly, to recheck their information,
and to not open the exam booklets until they have been told to do so.
Please note that uniform procedures are essential to a standardized testing program. The only
way to ensure comparable scores is if exam proctors follow the same procedures and give
instructions exactly as they appear in this book. By strictly following these procedures, you give
students the best chance of fair testing.
School Code and Home-School/Self-Study Codes
Post your six-digit school code and your school name prominently. If you don’t know your
school’s code, please get this information from your AP Coordinator. If you are testing students
who attend other schools and you know their school codes, post the numbers. For U.S. schools,
the code for home-schooled students in your state is on page 19 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual. Home-school/self-study codes for other countries are also listed on page 19 of the AP
Coordinator’s Manual.
Exam Materials
Be sure you have the correct exam packets, answer sheets, and AP Student Packs, particularly
if you have students in this group who have completed parts of the answer sheet at a
preadministration session or an earlier exam administration.
Total Administration Timing
Completion of student identification information will take about 30 minutes. Consult the table on
page 33 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for the actual testing time to determine the total
amount of time you’ll need.
Reading Instructions
Read aloud all the instructions in bold. When ellipses (. . .) appear in the text, pause to allow
time for students to follow the instructions. All other instructions are for you and should not
be read aloud. Spend as much time as necessary instructing students how to grid information
12
AP Exam Instructions
properly on the answer sheets. Read the instructions verbatim at a moderate pace. This allows
students to hear the complete instructions, preventing errors that could result in delays in score
reporting. You should answer all questions about procedure, but do not answer any questions
about exam content.
INTRODUCTION AND EXAM SECURITY
When you are ready to begin, say:
Good (morning/afternoon). Testing will begin after you complete the
identification information on your answer sheet. The College Board is
obligated to report scores that accurately reflect your performance.
Therefore, exam administration and security procedures are in place to
ensure that all of you have an equal opportunity to demonstrate your
abilities and that no one has an unfair advantage. Please listen carefully
to the following instructions.
You must now close all bags and place them on the floor under your chair;
you are not permitted to access them, including during the break, until you are
dismissed at the end of the exam. The following devices are prohibited: cell
phones, smartphones, smartwatches, laptops, tablet computers, portable
listening or recording devices such as MP3 players and iPods, cameras or
other photographic equipment, devices that can access the Internet, and
any other electronic or communication devices. If you are observed with
any of these devices at any time during testing or during breaks, the device
will be confiscated, you will be dismissed, and your score may be canceled.
You should be prepared to hold students’ electronic devices until the end of testing. You may
provide containers, such as paper lunch bags or plastic bags that can be marked with the student’s
name, to facilitate return of their devices.
You should have nothing on your desk except a No. 2 pencil and a pen with
black or dark blue ink. You will need the pencil to complete your answer
sheet and Section I of the exam; set aside the pen for now. You may not eat
or drink in this room. Raise your hand if you must go to the restroom during
the exam or need to leave the room for any emergency. You may not leave
the room at the end of testing until you have been dismissed. Do not remove
any pages from the exam booklets. Do not share or exchange materials with
anyone. If you use an unauthorized aid, such as a dictionary or unauthorized
calculator, fail to follow exam procedures, or create a disturbance, you may
be dismissed and your score may be canceled.
The College Board reserves the right to question any exam score that may be
the result of cheating. If you become aware of any possible cheating on this
exam, contact the Office of Testing Integrity. The phone number and
email address are in your Student Pack. Are there any questions? . . .
13
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS I
If you have any of these devices, bring them to me now. Make sure each
device is turned off. You may pick them up when you are dismissed. Are
there any questions? . . .
General Instructions I
DISTRIBUTION OF EXAM MATERIALS
I am now going to return Student Packs and answer sheets to those of you
who have already completed the identification information. Please make sure
you have been given the correct materials. . . .
Return Student Packs and answer sheets to students who have attended a preadministration
session or have already taken an AP Exam.
I will now distribute Student Packs and answer sheets to the rest of you.
Distribute one AP Student Pack and one answer sheet to each of the remaining students.
I am now going to give each of you an exam packet. Do not open it until I
tell you.
Distribute one exam packet to each student, being sure to hand out the packets in order.
When everyone has a Student Pack, an answer sheet, and an exam packet, say:
Is there anyone who does not have a Student Pack, an answer sheet, an
exam packet, a pencil, and a pen? . . .
Provide these materials, if necessary.
Please check your exam packet to make sure you have the correct exam.
Raise your hand if you do not see the correct exam title or today’s date on
the cover of the exam. . . .
If you have already completed the identification information, please sit
quietly. Recheck your information as we go along, but do not open your
exam packet.
STUDENT PACK AND UNIQUE AP NUMBER
Those of you who are completing the identification information for the
first time, follow the directions as I read them. This will help ensure that
your scores are provided correctly to you, your school, and the college
of your choice. Information you provide may be used for educational
research purposes.
Each year that you take AP Exams, you are assigned a new AP number. Your
2016 AP number is located on a sheet of labels in the center of your Student
Pack. You must use these same labels on all AP Exams you take in 2016. If
you run out of number labels, you must write your AP number in the areas
indicated. You may not receive a new AP Student Pack or share labels
with anyone. Turn to the sheet of AP number labels in the center of your
Student Pack. . . .
Now, in the upper right-hand corner of the sheet of number labels, write your
name in the space provided. . . .
When you have finished, pull off one label and turn to the back cover of
the Student Pack. Place the label in the top left-hand corner of the College
Information Card, where indicated. . . .
14
AP Exam Instructions
Now I have some very important information about your AP Exam scores. AP
scores are reported to you online only at apscore.org. Turn to the inside front
cover of your Student Pack and review the steps you’ll need to take to access
your scores online. . . .
Now turn to the back cover of your Student Pack and look at the AP number
card at the bottom of the inside flap. Take an AP number label from the center
of the Student Pack and place it on the card in the area indicated, write your
name on the card, and remove the card from the booklet. Place the card on
the floor under your chair for now. After you have been dismissed, put the
card in a safe spot, and keep it for future reference. Do NOT share your AP
number with anyone else. You will need the information on this card to view
your scores and to order AP score reporting services online in July. . . .
Now turn to the front cover of your Student Pack. Print your grade level, last
name, first name, and middle initial in the spaces indicated. . . .
Now print the six-digit school code for the school you attend. The school
code for [say your school’s name] is __ __ __ __ __ __. If you do not attend
[say your school’s name], enter the code for your school. If you do not know
your school’s code, leave the space blank. If you are home-schooled, the
code you should use is posted. . . .
Print your AP number in the spaces provided. Now fill in the box next to each
AP Exam you plan to take this year. . . .
COMPLETING THE ANSWER SHEET
Put your Student Pack aside and look at your answer sheet. Before we begin
completing the identification information on your answer sheet, I’d like to point
out that the area in purple on the right side of page 1 and all of page 4 needs to
be completed only once this year no matter how many AP Exams you take. The
areas in blue on page 1 must be completed each time you take an AP Exam.
Because AP score reports contain all of your AP Exam scores from each testing
year, it is very important that you provide the same identification information
from year to year and exam to exam. However, if you have moved, use your
current mailing address. You should use your full legal name. If you provide
your Social Security number one year, you should provide it the next year. If
you provide different information from year to year you could have an
incomplete score report. You must use a No. 2 pencil on your answer sheet so
that the information can be properly scanned. Pens and mechanical pencils are
not acceptable. If you erase, do so completely. Do not fold or bend your answer
sheet. Complete all fields carefully — incomplete or inconsistent information
can delay access to your scores.
15
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS I
After the exam, if you want to send comments or suggestions to the AP
Program, or if you believe there is a problem with an exam question, please
contact the AP Program directly. Contact information and instructions can be
found on page 3 of your Student Pack.
General Instructions I
Page 1, AP Number Label
Let’s begin. Look at page 1 of the answer sheet. Take an AP number label
from your Student Pack and place it in the white box at the top left-hand
corner. Then look up. . . .
If students accidentally place the number label in the space for the exam label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. This will not have an impact on the processing of their exam, so
they should not try to remove the label(s).
Page 1, Blue Area, Items A–H
Look at the statement above Item A, Signature, and read it carefully. Then sign
your legal name and print the date where indicated. Today’s date is May
.
You must do this each time you take an AP Exam. Then look up. . . .
In Item B, print your full legal name: last name, first name, and middle
initial. Do not enter a nickname. Below each box, fill in the circle of the
corresponding letter and then check to make sure each filled-in circle is
correct. If your name does not fit in the spaces provided, fill in as many
circles as you can. . . .
In Item C, copy your AP number from the label on your answer sheet and fill in
the corresponding circles beneath each digit. Do not use a label for Item C. . . .
In Item D, today’s date, print the two-digit number corresponding to the
current month (for May, you should write 0 and 5), and fill in the corresponding
circles. Then print the two-digit day and fill in the corresponding circles. . . .
This exam will begin at approximately
closest to this time. Then look up. . . .
. In Item E, fill in the circle
In Item F, everyone must copy the serial number that appears under Test Book
Serial Number on your multiple-choice booklet. Then fill in the corresponding
circles. Do not open the exam packet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Item G, the Online Provider Code, should be completed only by anyone who
has prepared for this exam by taking an online course or exam review. Doing
this allows the College Board to share your exam score with the online
provider. Online provider codes are in your Student Pack on pages 7–9. Print
the code number and fill in the circles. . . .
Look at Item H at the lower left-hand corner of page 1 of the answer sheet.
Print the name of this exam, the exam form, and the form code. The exam
form and the form code are located on the front cover of the Section I
booklet in the lower right-hand corner; ignore the large number under these
two items — it is not part of the form or form code. . . .
Everyone check that Items A through H are complete. Item G should be
completed only if you took an online course. . . .
Page 1, Purple Area, Items I–O
You are now going to complete the purple area of your answer sheet. If you
have already completed these items for this year, please sit quietly and wait
for the rest of the group to finish.
16
AP Exam Instructions
In Item I, print your phone number, including your area code, and fill in the
corresponding circles. . . .
Proctors: Read the following italicized text for students outside the U.S. only.
If your international phone number is longer than 10 digits, print your complete
phone number in the blank space provided at the bottom of Item I.
In Item J, print the school code you wrote on the front of your Student Pack
and fill in the corresponding circles. Then print the name, city, state, and
country of your school. . . .
Complete Item K, your date of birth. Provide your complete date of birth,
including the year. . . .
For Item L, if you are not sure of your Social Security number, don’t guess.
This item is optional. However, if you have previously taken an AP Exam and
you supplied this information, you should do so again. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
If you wish to send your scores to a college or university, complete Item M.
The list of college codes is in your Student Pack, starting on page 10. Then
print the name, city, state, and country of the college you have chosen. If
you do not want to send your scores at this time, leave this item blank. If
you cannot find your college in the Student Pack, use 9999 as the college
code, and provide as much information as you can about the college, such as
name, city, and state. . . .
Complete Item N, your current grade level. . . .
Page 4
Now flip over your answer sheet to page 4. . . .
This area needs to be completed only once each year. If you have already
completed it for this year, please sit quietly and wait for the rest of the
group to finish. In Item R, print your complete mailing address, including
the ZIP or postal code, and fill in the corresponding circles. In your Student
Pack on page 6, you will find the standard abbreviations you may use.
Show a separation between parts of your address by leaving a blank space.
If your address does not fit in the spaces provided, fill in as many circles as
you can. Be sure to fill in the circle for your state. You do not need to fill in a
country code if you reside in the U.S. Then look up. . . .
17
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS I
Item O asks if you wish to participate in the College Board’s Student
Search Service®, a free service that provides names of students to
certified educational organizations. You must fill in the “Yes” circle to let
colleges, universities, scholarship programs, and educational opportunity
organizations know that you are interested in receiving information about
the educational and financial aid opportunities they offer. The institutions
that request it will receive your name, address, email address, and some
other information you provide on this answer sheet. They will NOT receive
your actual exam scores or your telephone number. If you don’t answer this
question, and you previously chose to participate in this service, the College
Board will continue to provide your information. . . .
General Instructions I
Proctors: Read the following italicized text for students outside the U.S. only.
If your address does not fit in the spaces provided in Item R, fill in as many
circles as you can and then fill in the circle in Item S and print the remainder
of your address in the space provided. Fill in a country code in Item R only if
your address does not have a U.S. ZIP or postal code. Country codes are on
page 6 of your Student Pack. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item T, if you have a student identifier or student ID number issued by
your state, district, or school, enter that number here. You may enter up
to 25 characters. Use only numbers and letters. You will be able to use your
student ID number to access your AP Exam scores online in July. . . .
In Item U, please provide your email address so the College Board can
send you important information about your scores. If you have a College
Board account, be sure to use the same email address you used to create
your account.
Complete Items V, Sex; W, Which Language Do You Know Best?; and X,
Racial/Ethnic Group. For Item X, Racial/Ethnic Group, there are two questions.
If you identify with multiple races and ethnic groups, you may mark all
choices that apply to you. Are there any questions? . . .
In Item Y, in the first column, indicate the highest level of education of one
parent/guardian, and indicate whether this is your mother/female guardian
or father/male guardian. Then, if applicable, indicate the highest level of
education of your other parent/guardian in the second column, and indicate
whether this is your mother/female guardian or father/male guardian. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Page 2, Survey Questions
Everyone open your Student Pack to page 2, and turn to answer sheet page 2.
As you read the survey questions, enter your answers in the circles in Item P
on page 2 of your answer sheet. You will be asked to complete these questions
before every exam you take, and they will not affect your score. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Give students 2 minutes to answer the survey questions.
In a few minutes we’ll begin the exam. Close your Student Pack and put it
under your chair. You will need it again for Section II of the exam. Are there
any questions? . . .
Answer all questions and then begin the instructions for the exam you are administering.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time.
18
AP Exam Instructions
General Instructions II
Use these
instructions if:
Do not use these
instructions if:
All students in the group have completed the purple-shaded
areas on pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet this year, either at a
preadministration session or at their first exam.
Tip: Before students enter the exam room, check the Student Packs
and answer sheets for the group to confirm that all students have
already completed this information.
The group has any students who have not completed the purpleshaded areas on pages 1 and 4 of the answer sheet this year — you
must use General Instructions I on page 12.
OR
You are administering the AP Chinese Language and Culture Exam,
the AP Japanese Language and Culture Exam, or the AP Studio Art
portfolio assembly and submission.
Your group may include students who have completed a registration answer sheet at a
preadministration session and students who have taken an AP Exam using their registration
answer sheet. If so, some instructions will necessarily be repeated for the students who completed
a preadministration session. You will be instructing these students to sit quietly during the
completion of certain parts of the answer sheet, to recheck information, and to not open the
exam booklets until they have been told to do so.
School Code and Home-School/Self-Study Codes
Post your six-digit school code and your school name prominently. If you don’t know your
school’s code, please get this information from your AP Coordinator. If you are testing students
who attend other schools and you know their school codes, post the numbers. For U.S. schools,
the code for home-schooled students in your state is on page 19 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual. Home-school/self-study codes for other countries are also listed on page 19 of the AP
Coordinator’s Manual.
Exam Materials
Be sure you have the correct exam packets, answer sheets, and AP Student Packs.
Total Administration Timing
Completion of student identification information using General Instructions II should take less
than 30 minutes. Consult the table on page 33 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for the
actual testing time to determine the total amount of time you’ll need.
Reading Instructions
Read aloud all the instructions in bold. When ellipses ( . . . ) appear in the text, pause to allow
time for students to follow the instructions. All other instructions are for you and should not
be read aloud. Spend as much time as necessary instructing students how to grid information
19
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS II
Please note that uniform procedures are essential to a standardized testing program. The only
way to ensure comparable scores is if exam proctors follow the same procedures and give
instructions exactly as they appear in this book. By strictly following these procedures, you give
students the best chance of fair testing.
General Instructions II
properly on the answer sheets. Read the instructions verbatim at a moderate pace. This allows
students to hear the complete instructions, preventing errors that could result in delays in score
reporting. You should answer all questions about procedure, but do not answer any questions
about exam content.
INTRODUCTION AND EXAM SECURITY
When you are ready to begin, say:
Good (morning/afternoon). Testing will begin after you complete the
remaining identification information on your answer sheet. The College
Board is obligated to report scores that accurately reflect your performance.
Therefore, exam administration and security procedures are in place to
ensure that all of you have an equal opportunity to demonstrate your
abilities, and that no one has an unfair advantage. Please listen carefully to
the following instructions.
You must now close all bags and place them on the floor under your chair;
you are not permitted to access them, including during the break, until you
are dismissed at the end of the exam. Do not open them until you are
dismissed. The following devices are prohibited: cell phones, smartphones,
smartwatches, laptops, tablet computers, portable listening or recording
devices such as MP3 players and iPods, cameras or other photographic
equipment, devices that can access the Internet, and any other electronic or
communication devices. If you are observed with any of these devices at any
time during testing or during breaks, the device will be confiscated, you will be
dismissed, and your score may be canceled.
If you have any of these devices bring them to me now. Make sure each
device is turned off. You may pick them up when you are dismissed. Are
there any questions? . . .
You should be prepared to hold students’ electronic devices until the end of testing. You may
provide containers, such as paper lunch bags or plastic bags that can be marked with the student’s
name, to facilitate return of their devices.
You should have nothing on your desk except a No. 2 pencil and a pen with
black or dark blue ink. You will need the pencil to complete your answer
sheet and Section I of the exam; set aside the pen for now. You may not eat
or drink in this room. Raise your hand if you must go to the restroom during
the exam or need to leave the room for any emergency. You may not leave
the room at the end of testing until you have been dismissed. Do not remove
any pages from the exam booklets. Do not share or exchange materials with
anyone. If you use an unauthorized aid, such as a dictionary or unauthorized
calculator, fail to follow exam procedures, or create a disturbance, you may be
dismissed and your score may be canceled.
The College Board reserves the right to question any exam score that may be
the result of cheating. If you become aware of any possible cheating on this
exam, contact the Office of Testing Integrity. The phone number and email
address are in your Student Pack. Are there any questions? . . .
20
AP Exam Instructions
DISTRIBUTION OF EXAM MATERIALS
I am now going to return Student Packs and answer sheets to those of
you who have already completed most of the identification information
at a preadministration session. Please make sure you have been given the
correct materials. . . .
Return Student Packs and answer sheets to students who have attended a preadministration session.
I will now distribute Student Packs and answer sheets to the rest of you. Make
sure you have been given the correct Student Pack and a new answer sheet. . . .
Distribute the appropriate AP Student Pack and a new answer sheet to each of the remaining students.
I am now going to give each of you an exam packet. Do not open it until I tell you. . . .
Distribute one exam packet to each student, being sure to hand out the packets in order.
When everyone has a Student Pack, an answer sheet, and an exam packet, say:
Is there anyone who does not have a Student Pack, an answer sheet, an exam
packet, a pencil, and a pen? . . .
Provide these materials, if necessary.
Please check your exam packet to make sure you have the correct exam. Raise
your hand if you do not see the correct exam title or today’s date on the cover
of the exam. . . .
STUDENT PACK AND UNIQUE AP NUMBER
COMPLETING THE ANSWER SHEET
Page 1, AP Number Label
Let’s begin. Look at page 1 of the answer sheet. Take an AP number label
from your Student Pack and place it in the white box at the top left-hand
corner. Then look up. . . .
If students accidentally place the number label in the space for the exam label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. This will not have an impact on the processing of their exam, so
they should not try to remove the label(s).
Page 1, Blue Area, Items A–H
Look at the statement above Item A, Signature, and read it carefully. Then,
sign your legal name and print the date where indicated. Today’s date is
May
. You must do this each time you take an AP Exam. Then look up. . . .
21
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS II
All of you have already entered information on your Student Pack and completed
the area in purple on the right side of page 1 and all of page 4 of your registration
answer sheet. You need to do this only once each year. However, there are some
items on the answer sheet that need to be completed at each exam you take. If
the answer sheet in front of you has any of these items already completed, you
may recheck what you have entered, but do not open your exam packet.
General Instructions II
If Item B on your answer sheet is not complete, print your full legal name:
last name, first name, and middle initial. Below each box, fill in the circle of
the corresponding letter and then check to make sure each filled-in circle
is correct. If your name does not fit in the spaces provided, fill in as many
circles as you can. . . .
In Item C, copy your AP number from the label on your answer sheet and fill in
the corresponding circles beneath each digit. Do not use a label for Item C. . . .
In Item D, today’s date, print the two-digit number corresponding to the current
month (for May, you should write 0 and 5), and fill in the corresponding circles.
Then print the two-digit day and fill in the corresponding circles. . . .
This exam will begin at approximately
closest to this time. Then look up. . . .
. In Item E, fill in the circle
In Item F, everyone must copy the serial number that appears under Test
Book Serial Number on your multiple-choice booklet. Then fill in the
corresponding circles. Do not open the exam packet. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Item G, the Online Provider Code, should be completed only by anyone who
has prepared for this exam by taking an AP online course or exam review.
Doing this allows the College Board to share your exam score with the online
provider. Online provider codes are in your Student Pack on pages 7–9. Print
the code number and fill in the circles. . . .
Look at Item H at the lower left-hand corner of page 1 of the answer sheet.
Print the name of this exam, the exam form, and the form code. The exam
form and the form code are located on the front cover of the Section I
booklet in the lower right-hand corner; ignore the large number under these
two items — it is not part of the form or form code. . . .
Everyone check that Items A through H are complete. Item G should be
completed only if you took an online course. . . .
Page 2, Survey Questions
Everyone open your Student Pack to page 2, and turn to answer sheet page 2.
As you read the survey questions, enter your answers in the circles in Item P
on page 2 of your answer sheet. You will be asked to complete these questions
before every exam you take, and they will not affect your score. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Give students 2 minutes to answer the survey questions.
In a few minutes we’ll begin the exam. Close your Student Pack and put it
under your chair for now. You will need it again for Section II of the exam.
Are there any questions? . . .
Answer all questions and then begin the instructions for the exam you are administering.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time.
22
AP® Art History ExamAP Exam Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday afternoon, May 3, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. Section II Total Time: 2 hrs.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour
Number of Questions: 80*
Section II
(approximately 35 discrete questions and
45 questions in sets, including questions
based on images)
Total Time: 2 hours
Number of Questions: 6
(two 30-minute and four 15-minute questions)
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday afternoon, May 3, and you will be taking the AP Art History Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Art History Exam.
23
ART HISTORY
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
Art History
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet but do not open the exam booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals and Section II exam booklet aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa,
advise them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the labels; their exam
can still be processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Section I is the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have in front
of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your answer
sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
In Section I, you have 1 hour to answer 80 multiple-choice questions. Each
question has four answer choices. The answer sheet has circles marked A–E
for each question. For Art History, you will use only the circles marked A–D.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work.
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour for this section. Open your Section I exam booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II materials.
9
3
6
24
AP Exam Instructions
After 50 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your exam booklet and put your answer sheet on your
desk, face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam
label on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your
answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the orange Section II: Free Response, Images booklet until you are told
to do so. Put the orange booklet aside. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II exam
booklet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
25
ART HISTORY
After the break, say:
Art History
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
While Student Packs are being collected, read the information on the back
cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the booklet until you are told to do
so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Section II is the free-response portion of the exam. In Section II, you
have 2 hours to answer the six essay questions. Most questions refer
to images. The images are reproduced in the orange booklet labeled
Section II: Free Response, Images. Do not open the orange booklet until I
tell you to do so.
Questions 1 and 2 are long essay questions, and you are advised to spend
30 minutes on each. Questions 3 through 6 are short essay questions, and
you are advised to spend 15 minutes on each. I will tell you when each
time interval has elapsed, but you may proceed freely from one question
to another.
Read the questions carefully. You can receive full credit only by directly
answering all aspects of the question. For Questions 1 and 2, you may use
the blank space provided with the questions to organize your responses.
Notes in the blank spaces will not be scored.
26
AP Exam Instructions
Section II requires answers in essay form. Write clearly and legibly. Use
complete sentences. An outline or bulleted list is not acceptable. Cross out
any errors you make; crossed-out work will not be scored.
For questions that require you to identify a work of art, you should try to
include all of the following identifiers: title or designation, name of the artist
and/or culture of origin, date of creation, and materials. You will earn credit
for the identification if you provide at least two accurate identifiers beyond
any included in the question, but you will not be penalized if additional
identifiers you provide are inaccurate.
You must write your responses in the exam booklet using a pen with black
or dark blue ink. You may make notes in the orange booklet, but the only
responses that will be scored are those that are written on the lined pages in
the Section II exam booklet. If you need more paper during the exam, raise
your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write
only your AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not
write your name. If you finish before time is called, you may check your work.
Are there any questions? . . .
You may now open both your Section II booklet and your orange booklet to
Question 1 and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in the Section II exam booklets and not in
their orange booklets. After 30 minutes, say:
9
3
6
Thirty minutes have passed and you are advised to go on to Question 2.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 30 minutes, say:
Thirty minutes have passed and you are advised to go on to Question 3.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
Fifteen minutes have passed and you are advised to go on to Question 4.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
Fifteen minutes have passed and you are advised to go on to Question 5.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
12
9
6
3
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet and orange booklet. Place them
on your desk, face up. Do not place your Section II exam booklet inside your
orange booklet or vice versa.
27
ART HISTORY
Fifteen minutes have passed and you are advised to go on to Question 6,
which is the final question.
Art History
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected.
Collect a Section II exam booklet and an orange booklet from each student. Check for the
following:
•• Front cover of exam booklet: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Back cover of exam booklet: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
•• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may never discuss the questions and related images in this exam with
anyone unless the specific questions and related images are released on the
College Board website in about two days. Your AP Exam score results will be
available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions and related images in this exam may ever be
discussed or shared in any way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will
be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP Instructional
Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject score roster at the class
section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the appropriate
circle on their registration answer sheets.
28
AP Exam Instructions
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
! materials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
sorting exam materials for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the
Section II exam booklets. Do not place Section II exam booklets inside the orange
booklets or vice versa. The free-response questions and related images for the
regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed unless the questions and related
images are released on the College Board website two days after the exam.
ART HISTORY
29
Biology
AP® Biology Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday morning, May 9, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 69*
Section II
(63 multiple-choice questions plus 6 grid-in
questions; 1 hour 30 minutes)
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 8 questions
(2 ten-point questions, 3 four-point questions,
and 3 three-point questions, 10-minute reading
period, 1 hour 20-minute writing period)
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Note: Four-function calculators (with square
root) may be used on all sections of the AP
Biology Exam.
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra calculators
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “ Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice and Grid-In
Students are allowed to use four-function (with square root) calculators throughout the entire
AP Biology Exam. Graphing calculators and scientific calculators are not permitted for use on the
AP Biology Exam. See pages 44–47 of the 2015- 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information.
Before starting the exam administration, make sure each student has an appropriate calculator.
If a student does not have a calculator, you may provide one from your supply. If the student does
not want to use the calculator you provide or does not want to use a calculator at all, he or she
must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45 of the 2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s
Manual. Students may have no more than two calculators on their desks. Calculators may not
be shared.
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
30
AP Exam Instructions
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday morning, May 9, and you will be taking the AP Biology Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Biology Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015 -1 6 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out
the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
For the grid-in questions, you will solve each problem, write your final numeric
answer in the boxes at the top of the grid, and fill in the corresponding circles.
Enter your responses for the grid-in questions on page 3 of the answer sheet
beginning with number 121. You will receive credit only if the circles are filled
31
BIOLOGY
Section I is the multiple-choice and grid-in portion of the exam. For the
multiple-choice questions, the answer sheet has circles marked A–E for
each question. For Biology, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You
must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. Mark all of your responses beginning on page 2 of
your answer sheet, one response per question. No credit will be given for
anything written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you
may use the margins or any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch
work. If you need to erase, do so carefully and completely. Your score on
the multiple-choice section will be based solely on the number of questions
answered correctly. Four-function calculators (with square root) are allowed.
Biology
in correctly. Please pay close attention to the directions in your exam booklet
for completing the grid-in questions.
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets, and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover of
the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during
the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, use your
calculators, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
32
.
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
33
BIOLOGY
The total Section II time is 1 hour and 30 minutes. This includes a 10-minute
reading period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to
develop thoughtful, well-organized responses. You are advised to spend the
10-minute period reading all the questions, and to use the unlined pages
to sketch graphs, make notes, and plan your answers. The focus of the
reading period should be the organization of questions 1 and 2. You may
begin writing your exam responses before the reading period is over. You
may make notes on the pages that contain the exam questions, but your
responses must be written on the designated lined pages using a pen with
black or dark blue ink. Are there any questions? . . .
Biology
You are responsible for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one
question to the next. Be sure that you answer all of the questions. If you
need more paper to complete your responses, raise your hand. At the top of
each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number, and
• the question number you are working on.
You may now open the Section II booklet and begin the 10-minute
reading period.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 10 minutes, say:
The reading period is over. You have 1 hour and 20 minutes remaining to complete
Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 1 hour and 10 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up.
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II exam booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
34
AP Exam Instructions
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
BIOLOGY
35
AP® Calculus AB/BC Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 5, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time, Calculus AB: 1 hr. 45 min.
Section I Total Time, Calculus BC: 1 hr. 45 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 45 minutes
Number of Questions: 45*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time, Calculus AB: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section II Total Time, Calculus BC: 1 hr. 30 min.
Part A:
Number of Questions: 28
Time: 55 minutes
Part B:
Number of Questions: 17
Time: 50 minutes
No calculator allowed
Graphing calculator required
Part A:
Number of Questions: 2
Time: 30 minutes
Percent of Section II Score:
33.3%
Part B:
Number of Questions: 4
Time: 60 minutes
Percent of Section II Score:
66.6%
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 6
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Either pencil or
pen with black or dark blue ink
Note: For Section II, if students finish Part A
before the end of the timed 30 minutes for
Part A, they cannot begin working on Part B.
Students must wait until the beginning of the
timed 60 minutes for Part B. However, during
the timed portion for Part B, students may
work on the problems in Part A without the
use of a calculator.
Graphing calculator required
No calculator allowed
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra graphing calculators
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SEATING POLICY FOR AP CALCULUS AB AND CALCULUS BC EXAMS
Testing Window
Exams Administered at Schools in the
United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, and
the U.S. Virgin Islands
Regularly Scheduled
Exams
Students must be seated no less than
four feet apart.
Late-Testing Exams
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
36
Exams Administered at Schools Outside
the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico,
and the U.S. Virgin Islands
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
AP Exam Instructions
Graphing calculators are required to answer some of the questions on the AP Calculus Exams.
Before starting the exam administration, make sure each student has a graphing calculator
from the approved list on page 47 of the 2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual. If a student does
not have a graphing calculator from the approved list, you may provide one from your supply.
If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide or does not want to use a
calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45
of the AP Coordinator’s Manual.
During the administration of Section I, Part B, and Section II, Part A, students may have no
more than two graphing calculators on their desks. Calculators may not be shared. Calculator
memories do not need to be cleared before or after the exam. Students with Hewlett-Packard
48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860 graphing calculators may use cards designed for use with these
calculators. Proctors should make sure infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing each
other. Since graphing calculators can be used to store data, including text, proctors should
monitor that students are using their calculators appropriately. Attempts by students to use
the calculator to remove exam questions and/or answers from the room may result in the
cancellation of AP Exam scores.
The AP Calculus AB Exam and the AP Calculus BC Exam should be administered simultaneously.
They may be administered in separate rooms, or in the same room if it is more convenient.
!
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
These exams include survey questions. The time allowed for the survey questions is in addition to
the actual test-taking time.
Make sure you begin the exams at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 5, and you will be taking either the AP Calculus AB
Exam or the AP Calculus BC Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 19, and you will be taking either the AP Calculus AB
Exam or the AP Calculus BC Exam.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015 -1 6 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
Please check to make sure you have the correct exam: Calculus AB or
Calculus BC. Raise your hand if you do not have the correct exam. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out
the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
37
CALCULUS
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
Calculus
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when
you have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or
any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work.
Section I is divided into two parts. Each part is timed separately, and you
may work on each part only during the time allotted for it. Calculators are
not allowed in Part A. Please put your calculators under your chair. Are
there any questions? . . .
You have 55 minutes for Part A. Part A questions are numbered 1 through 28.
Mark your responses for these questions on page 2 of your answer sheet.
Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on page 2 of their answer sheets and that they are not looking
beyond Part A. The line of A’s at the top of each page will assist you in monitoring students’ work.
After 45 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working on Part A and turn to page 22 in your Section I booklet. . . .
On that page, you should see an area marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Making
sure all of your other exam materials, including your answer sheet, are out
38
AP Exam Instructions
of the way, take one of your seals and press it on that area and then fold
the seal over the open edge to the front cover. Be sure you don’t seal the
Part B section of the booklet or let the seal touch anything except the
marked areas. . . .
After all students have sealed Part A, say:
Graphing calculators are required for Part B. You may get your calculators
from under your chair and place them on your desk. Part B questions are
numbered 76 through 92. Fold your answer sheet so only page 3 is showing
and mark your responses for these questions on that page. You have
50 minutes for Part B. You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students have
sealed their booklets properly and are now working on Part B. The large B’s in an alternating
shaded pattern at the top of each page will assist you in monitoring their work. Proctors should
make sure that students are using their calculators appropriately. Proctors should also make sure
Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and turn to page 38. You have 3 minutes to answer Questions
93–96. These are survey questions and will not affect your score. You may
not go back to work on any of the exam questions. . . .
Give students approximately 3 minutes to answer the survey questions. Then say:
Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make
sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on page 1 of your
answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your Section I booklet. Remove the remaining white
seals from the backing and press one on each area of your exam booklet
cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over the back cover. When
you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face up. I will now collect
your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on top of your desk during the break.
You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks
during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, use
your calculators, check email, use a social networking site, or access any
39
CALCULUS
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Calculus
electronic or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the
multiple-choice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including
your teacher and other students. If you disclose these questions through any
means, your AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the Section II exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet, paying careful
attention to the bulleted statements in the instructions. Do not open the exam
booklet or break the seals in the exam booklet until you are told to do so. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
40
AP Exam Instructions
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Section II also has two parts that are timed separately. You are responsible
for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next
within each part. Graphing calculators are required for Part A, so you may
keep your calculators on your desk. You must write your answers in the
appropriate space in the exam booklet using a No. 2 pencil or a pen with
black or dark blue ink. Do not break the seals for Part B at this time.
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 30 minutes to answer the questions in Part A. If you need more
paper during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of
paper you use, be sure to write only your AP number and the question
number you are working on. Do not write your name. Open your exam
booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
working on Part A only and writing their answers in their exam booklets using pencils or pens
with black or dark blue ink. The pages for the Part A questions are marked with large 1s or 2s at
the top of each page to assist you in monitoring their work. After 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining in Part A.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working on Part A. Calculators are not allowed for Part B. Please put all
of your calculators under your chair. . . .
Turn to page 13. You have 1 hour for Part B. During this time you may go back
to Part A, but you may not use your calculator. Remember to show your work
and write your answer to each part of each problem in the appropriate space
in the exam booklet. Are there any questions? . . .
Using your finger, break open the seals on Part B. Do not peel the seals away
from the booklet. You may begin Part B.
12
9
6
3
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 50 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining in Part B.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
41
CALCULUS
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Calculus
Collect a Section II exam booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a
longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments
unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
42
AP® Chemistry Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday morning, May 2, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 45 min.
Section I
Section II
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Calculator not permitted
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Number of Questions: 60*
Total Time: 1 hour 45 minutes
Calculators allowed for all of Section II
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Either pencil or pen
with black or dark blue ink
Number of Questions: 7
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
(3 ten-point and 4 four-point
questions; 105 minutes)
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra calculators
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Note: Tables of equations and constants are provided in the exam booklets for both sections of
the exam.
43
CHEMISTRY
Students are not allowed to use calculators in Section I of the AP Chemistry Exam. However,
students are permitted to use four-function, scientific, or graphing calculators to answer
questions in Section II. Before starting the exam administration, make sure that each student
has an appropriate calculator and that any student with a graphing calculator has a model from
the approved list on page 47 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual. See pages 44–47 of the
AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. If a student does not have an appropriate
calculator or has a graphing calculator not on the approved list, you may provide one from your
supply. If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide, or does not want to use a
calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45 of the
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
Chemistry
During the administration of Section II students may have no more than two calculators on
their desks. Calculators may not be shared. Calculator memories do not need to be cleared
before or after the exam. Students with Hewlett-Packard 48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860
graphing calculators may use cards designed for use with these calculators. Proctors should make
sure infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing each other. Since graphing calculators
can be used to store data, including text, proctors should monitor that students are using
their calculators appropriately. Attempts by students to use the calculator to remove exam
questions and/or answers from the room may result in the cancellation of AP Exam scores.
Students will be allowed to use the table of equations and constants on both sections of the exam.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday morning, May 2, and you will be taking the AP Chemistry Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Chemistry Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
44
AP Exam Instructions
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles A–E for each question. For Chemistry, you will
use only the circles marked A–D. You must complete the answer sheet using
a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning on page 2 of your
answer sheet, one response per question. Completely fill in the circles. If
you need to erase, do so carefully and completely. No credit will be given
for anything written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but
you may use the margins or any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch
work. Calculators are not allowed for this section. Please put your calculators
under your chair. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on top of your desk during
the break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
45
CHEMISTRY
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
Chemistry
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number
in the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
exam booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
46
AP Exam Instructions
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Calculators may be used for Section II. You may get your calculators from
under your chair and place them on your desk. . . .
You have 1 hour and 45 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible
for pacing yourself, and you may proceed freely from one question to the
next. You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with
black or dark blue ink or a No. 2 pencil. If you use a pencil, be sure that your
writing is dark enough to be easily read. If you need more paper during the
exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be
sure to write only your AP number and the question number you are working
on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Proctors should also
make sure that Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that
students are not sharing calculators. After 1 hour and 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
47
CHEMISTRY
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
Chemistry
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
48
AP® Chinese Language and Culture Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 5, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 20 min.
Section II Total Time: 41 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 20 minutes
Number of Questions: 70*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Part A:
Listening
Time: 20 minutes
Part B:
Reading
Time: 60 minutes
Part A:
Writing
Time: 30 minutes
Part B:
Speaking
Time: 11 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 41 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic devices
(if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
•Watch
• Colored scratch paper
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
• Fee Reduction/Section Designation
Form
These instructions combine the General Instructions with the exam-specific instructions for
AP Chinese Language and Culture. Students who have already completed the purple areas on a
registration answer sheet for 2016, either at a preadministration session or at their first exam, will
not need to complete certain information. When you have a group that includes students who
have filled out these areas on the answer sheet and some who have not, you will be instructing
those who have already filled out their registration information to sit quietly and not to complete
certain fields. All students should be following your instructions and continue navigating
through the screens as a group to access the confirmation screen and the exam.
Note: Any information entered during a practice session using the Setup CD is not saved and
does not constitute a preadministration session.
Please note that uniform procedures are essential to a standardized testing program. The only
way to ensure comparable scores is if exam proctors follow the same procedures and give
instructions exactly as they appear in this book. By strictly following these procedures, you give
students the best chance of fair testing.
49
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
• AP Student Packs
• AP Chinese Language and
Culture Exam CDs
• 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
• Exam passwords and codes
(see page 107 in the 2015-16 AP
Coordinator’s Manual)
• This book — AP Exam Instructions
• AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
•AP SSD Guidelines booklet
• School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
Chinese Language and Culture
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with the following procedures,
found in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual:
•• Resuming or terminating an interrupted exam — pages 113 –1 15
•• Troubleshooting tips — pages 118 –1 21
•• Post-exam activities — pages 116 –1 17
Notes:
•• Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are not supported for
2016. The Apple Mac and iMac computer systems are not supported for 2016. Complete
hardware/software and technical configuration requirements are available on pages 104
and 105 of the 2015-16 Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Microsoft® Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Enterprise, and Windows 10
Education are supported operating systems for the 2016 administration of the AP Chinese
Language and Culture Exam.
School Code and Home-School/Self-Study Codes
Post your six-digit school code and your school name prominently. If you don’t know your
school’s code, please get this information from your AP Coordinator. If you are testing students
who attend other schools and you know their school codes, post the numbers. For U.S. schools,
the code for home-schooled students in your state is on page 19 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual. Home-school/self-study codes for other countries are also listed on page 19 of the
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
Exam Materials
Be sure you have the correct exam CDs and AP Student Packs. As students enter the testing
room, the proctor should hand three sheets of photocopied colored scratch paper (use the
template on page 125 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual) and a pencil to each student.
Reading Instructions
Read aloud all the instructions in bold. When ellipses (. . .) appear in the text, pause to allow
time for students to follow the instructions. All other instructions are for you and should not be
read aloud. Spend as much time as necessary instructing students how to enter the information
properly on the computer screens. Read the instructions verbatim at a moderate pace. This
allows students to hear the complete instructions, preventing errors that could result in delays
in score reporting. You should answer all questions about procedure, but do not answer any
questions about exam content.
You should assign students to the workstations. (Computers for any students with disabilities
approved for screen magnification should have been identified prior to the administration. These
computers should have had the screen magnification software installed.) Make sure everyone is
seated and that you have everyone’s attention.
50
AP Exam Instructions
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 5, and you will be taking the AP Chinese Language
and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Chinese Language
and Culture Exam.
You must now close all bags and place them on the floor under your
chair; you are not permitted to access them, including during the break,
until you are dismissed at the end of the exam. The following devices
are prohibited: cell phones, smartphones, smartwatches, laptops, tablet
computers, portable listening or recording devices such as MP3 players and
iPods, cameras or other photographic equipment, devices that can access
the Internet, and any other electronic or communication devices. If you are
observed with any of these devices at any time during testing or breaks,
the device will be confiscated, you will be dismissed, and your score may
be canceled.
If you have any of these devices, bring them to me now. Make sure each
device is turned off. You may pick them up when you are dismissed. Are
there any questions? . . .
You should be prepared to hold students’ electronic devices until the end of testing. You may
provide containers, such as paper lunch bags or plastic bags that can be marked with the
student’s name, to facilitate return of their devices.
You should have nothing at your workstation except a pencil and three
sheets of colored scratch paper. Take a moment and write your name and
AP number on the scratch paper. . . .
The scratch paper will be collected at the end of the exam. If you need
additional scratch paper, raise your hand. I will collect your used scratch
paper before I can give you more. You may not eat or drink in this room.
Raise your hand if you must go to the restroom during the exam or if you
need to leave the room for any emergency. You may not leave the room at
the end of testing until you have been dismissed.
51
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Please listen very carefully to all of my instructions. You will all begin
testing at the same time, and you will all be dismissed at the same time
for the break as well as at the end of the exam. Please do not touch the
keyboard until I tell you to do so. Testing will begin after you complete
the identification information on your computer screen. The College Board
is obligated to report scores that accurately reflect your performance.
Therefore, exam administration and security procedures are in place to
ensure that all of you have an equal opportunity to demonstrate your
abilities and that no one has an unfair advantage. Please listen carefully to
the following instructions.
Chinese Language and Culture
Do not share or exchange materials with anyone. Furthermore, you should
not — nor should you attempt to — change, add, or utilize any options,
settings, and/or programs within your workstation that are not authorized
as part of the AP Exam delivery system. If you use an unauthorized aid,
such as a dictionary, fail to follow exam procedures, or create a disturbance,
you may be dismissed and your score may be canceled.
The College Board reserves the right to question any exam score that may
be the result of cheating. If you become aware of any possible cheating on
this exam, contact the Office of Testing Integrity. The phone number and
email address are in your Student Pack. Are there any questions? . . .
I will now return Student Packs to those of you who have already completed
the identification information. Please make sure you have been given your
correct materials. . . .
Return Student Packs to students who have attended a preadministration session or have already
taken an AP Exam.
I will now distribute Student Packs to the rest of you. . . .
STUDENT PACK AND UNIQUE AP NUMBER
Distribute one AP Student Pack to each of the remaining students. You may skip the following
instructions for completing the AP Student Pack and AP number card, if all students have
already done this. When everyone has a Student Pack, say:
Is there anyone who does not have a Student Pack? . . .
Provide a Student Pack, if necessary.
If you have already completed the identification information, please sit
quietly. You will still be required to navigate through the screens and
complete certain information.
Those of you who are completing the identification information for the
first time, follow the directions as I read them. This will help ensure that
your scores are provided correctly to you, your school, and the college
of your choice. Information you provide may be used for educational
research purposes.
Each year that you take AP Exams, you are assigned a new AP number.
Your 2016 AP number is located on a sheet of labels in the center of your
Student Pack. You must use these same labels on all AP Exams you take in
2016. If you run out of number labels, you must write your AP number in the
areas indicated. You may not receive a new AP Student Pack or share labels
with anyone. Turn to the sheet of AP number labels in the center of your
Student Pack. . . .
Now, in the upper right-hand corner of the sheet of number labels, write
your name in the space provided. . . .
When you have finished, pull off one label and turn to the back cover of
the Student Pack. Place the label in the top left-hand corner of the College
Information Card, where indicated. . . .
52
AP Exam Instructions
Your scores will be available online in July. Turn to the inside front cover of
your Student Pack and review the steps you’ll need to take to access your
scores online. . . .
Now turn to the back cover of your Student Pack and see the AP number
card at the bottom of the inside flap. Take an AP number label and place it
on the card in the area indicated, write your name on the card and remove
the card from the booklet. Place the card on the floor under your chair for
now. After you have been dismissed, put the card in a safe spot and keep it
for future reference. Do NOT share your AP number with anyone else. You
will need the information on this card to view your scores and order AP
score reporting services online in July. . . .
Now turn to the front cover of your Student Pack. Print your grade level, last
name, first name and middle initial in the spaces indicated. . . .
Students will be required to enter their school code in the Student Information registration
screens. Call AP Services if you are unable to determine the school code for any student.
Print your AP number in the spaces provided. Now fill in the box next to
each AP Exam you plan to take this year.
If you want to send comments or suggestions to the AP Program, or if you
believe there is a problem with an exam question, contact the AP Program
directly. Contact information and instructions can be found on page 3 of
your Student Pack.
I will now distribute an exam CD to each of you.
Distribute one exam CD to each student.
Please remove the shrinkwrap and take the CD out of the case. Take an AP
number label and place it on the CD. . . .
Now insert the CD in the CD drive of your computer. . . .
A small window with a dark blue background will appear. This may take
a few moments. Some messages will appear.
Next, a full screen with a lighter blue background will appear with a
message indicating that the IME configuration is in progress. Some
configuration messages will automatically appear and disappear. Don’t
touch the keyboard or click the mouse until I tell you. Look up when you
see the screen titled “Student Information Part 1.”. . .
If you see anything on the screen that isn’t what I have just described,
please raise your hand for assistance. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
53
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Now print the six-digit school code for the school you attend. The school
code for [say your school’s name] is __ __ __ __ __ __. If you do not attend [say
your school’s name], enter the code for your school. If you are home-schooled,
the code you should use is posted. If you do not know your school’s code,
raise your hand. . . .
Chinese Language and Culture
May I have everyone’s attention? As you navigate through the Student
Information registration screens, note that you may use the Next and
Previous buttons or use the scroll bar on the right, as necessary.
Put your Student Pack aside. Before we begin with the first Student
Information registration screen, I’d like to point out that it is very important
that you provide the same identification information from year to year and
exam to exam. If you provide different information from year to year you
could have an incomplete score report.
Let’s begin. The title under the shaded box should read Student Information
Part 1. Everyone must enter the following information. Please enter your AP
number, last name, first name, and middle initial. Note that you can enter no
more than 15 alphabetic characters for your last name. . . .
For students who have been approved by the College Board SSD Office to receive testing
accommodations, you should go to the student’s computer and check the box: “Check here if
you require testing accommodations.” You will then need to enter the administrator password
to access the screen titled “Computer Delivered Testing Accommodations.” This screen includes
options for the following testing accommodations: additional breaks, adjustable colors, extended
time, and screen magnification. Check the boxes that apply and use the drop-down menus to
choose the approved amount of time for breaks and extended time for this student. (See pages
15–17 of the AP SSD Guidelines booklet for step-by-step instructions.)
Are there any questions? . . .
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the next screen titled Student
Information Part 2. . . .
The Online Provider Code field should be completed by anyone who has
prepared for this exam by taking an online course or exam review. Use the
drop-down menu to select your provider. Doing this allows the College
Board to share your exam score with the online provider. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Read and complete the questions regarding language. . . .
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the next screen titled Student
Information Part 3. Before we continue, I’d like to point out that this
information needs to be completed only once this year no matter how
many AP Exams you take. If you have completed a registration AP answer
sheet this year, check the box at the top of the screen, then wait quietly
until I tell you to click “Next.” Are there any questions? . . .
Those of you who must complete this information, enter your date of birth
in the order day/month/year. . . .
Please enter your Social Security number. If you are not sure of your Social
Security number, don’t guess. This item is optional. However, if you have
previously taken an AP Exam and you supplied this information, you should
do so again. . . .
54
AP Exam Instructions
Complete the information for Sex and Racial/Ethnic Group. For Racial/Ethnic
Group, there are two questions. If you identify with multiple races and
ethnic groups, you may mark all choices that apply to you. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
For the next two questions on this screen, indicate the highest level of
education completed by your parents or guardians by selecting from the
drop-down menus. . . .
Now answer the last question about language. Do not go on to the next
screen until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
May I have everyone’s attention? All of you may now click “Next” to go to
the screen titled Home Address and Phone. If you have already completed
it for this year, please sit quietly and wait for the rest of the group to finish.
Enter your complete mailing address, including the ZIP or postal code. . . .
Now please provide your email address so the College Board can
send you important information about your scores. If you mark “Yes”
when we get to Student Search Service®, this email address will be
provided to colleges, universities, scholarship programs and educational
opportunity organizations. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the screen titled School and
College Information. In the first field, remember to enter the code of the
school that you attend. . . .
Now, if you have a student identifier or student ID number issued by your
state, district or school, enter that number here. You may enter up to
25 characters. Use only numbers and letters. You will be able to use your
student ID number to access your AP Exam scores online in July. . . .
From the drop-down menu, select your current grade level. . . .
Now you will need the code number of the college you want to receive
your AP Exam score report. The list of college codes is in your Student
Pack, starting on page 10. You must fill in this item, or your score report
will not be sent. If there is no code listed for your college, enter 0000 (four
zeroes), then complete the College Information Card on the back cover of
your Student Pack and submit it to AP Services to avoid the score reporting
fee. If you don’t have a college you’d like to send your score report to,
you should also enter 0000. However, if you wish to send your scores to a
college later, you will have to pay a fee. . . .
The last item asks if you wish to participate in the College Board’s Student
Search Service®, a free service that provides names of students to certified
55
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Now enter your phone number, including your area code. Do not
go on to the next screen until you are told to do so. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Chinese Language and Culture
educational organizations. Selecting “Yes” lets colleges, universities,
scholarship programs, and educational opportunity organizations know
that you are interested in receiving information about the educational and
financial aid opportunities they offer. The institutions that request it will
receive your name, address, and some other information that you’ve already
provided. They will not receive your actual exam scores or your telephone
number. If you don’t answer this question, and you previously chose to
participate in this service, the College Board will continue to provide your
information. Do not go on to the next screen until you are told to do so.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
When everyone has looked up, say:
Now click “Next.” This screen is confirmation of all the information you
have entered so far. Review the information carefully. You will not be able
to make changes after continuing. If you need to make changes, click
“Previous” and return to the screens that require revision. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
May I have everyone’s attention? You may now click “Continue” to go to
the survey questions, which everyone must complete. Everyone turn to
page 2 of your Student Pack. Read the survey questions, then click on the
appropriate buttons on the screen to answer these questions. You will be
asked to complete these questions before every exam you take, and they
will not affect your score. Do not click “Continue” until you are told to do
so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The identification information for your exam is now complete. Close
your Student Pack and put it under your chair for now. Do not touch the
computer until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
When everyone has looked up, say:
You may now click “Continue” and go to the screen titled “Typing Options
for the Writing Part of the Exam.” If you intend to use the Bopomofo input
method in the Writing part, you do not need to take any action on this
screen at this time; please sit quietly until I tell you to click “Continue.”
If you intend to use the Pinyin input method in the Writing part, you
must choose now whether you want to type your responses in simplified
characters or traditional characters. Locate the IME toolbar on this screen
and use the appropriate toggle button to select either simplified or
traditional characters. Do not click any other buttons on the toolbar. Please
read this entire screen carefully. If you want to test the Pinyin setting, you
can try typing in the white box on the screen. Wait until I tell you to go on
to the next screen. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
56
AP Exam Instructions
Answer all questions and then begin the instructions for the exam. Make sure you begin the
exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating chart for this exam. See
pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 112). Then say:
Now click “Continue” and proceed to the screen titled “Begin Exam.” Wait
there until I tell you to go on.
The AP Chinese Language and Culture Exam is completely computer-based.
However, if you need assistance at any time during the exam, raise your
hand. At various points throughout the exam, you will be asked to check
your headsets and microphone volume levels, and to perform various tasks.
Follow the instructions carefully.
While you are working on the exam, you may make notes on the colored
scratch paper. You may not use your own scratch paper, and you may not
remove any portion of the scratch paper from the testing room at any time.
Are there any questions? . . .
After the two parts in the multiple-choice section, Listening and Reading,
you will have a 10-minute break. You will not all reach the break screen
at the same time. When you reach the break screen, read the message
carefully. The screen will read “Your break will begin when the proctor
dismisses the entire group. . . .” The timer will count down the time, but this
will not affect your break or completing the next section of the exam. Do
not leave your workstation. You will all begin the break at the same time,
and return from break at the same time. Sit quietly at your workstation until
I give instructions to dismiss the entire group. Are there any questions? . . .
From now until you reach the break screen, you should follow the directions
on your computer. Throughout the exam, some screens will require that you
click on the “Continue” button at the top right of the screen. Other screens
will appear for an amount of time that should be long enough for you to
read the directions completely, and then the exam will go on automatically.
For your reference, important directions will be repeated on subsequent
screens or you will be able to access them by clicking on the Help button.
You may now click “Begin Exam” on the screen, and launch your exam. . . .
57
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
This exam consists of a multiple-choice section and a free-response
section. When you reach the General Directions screen, read it completely.
The timer on the computer will let you know how much time you have
for each question or part. Please note that the directions throughout the
exam regarding timing for specific questions reflect the standard timing.
The timer is in the upper-right hand corner of the screen. If you have been
approved for extended time, the adjusted timing for applicable parts of the
exam will be reflected accurately on the timer. The exam will not stop until
it is time to have a break.
Chinese Language and Culture
Ensure that all students click “Begin Exam” and that they have launched their exams. You
should circulate around the testing room to ensure that students have launched their exams
and that they are following the directions on the screens. As students complete the second part
(Reading) and reach the break screen, make sure that they are sitting quietly, not touching their
keyboards, and not disturbing the other students still testing. When all students have reached
the break screen, say:
Has everyone reached the break screen? . . .
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in
any way. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. When you return from break, you must
return to your assigned workstation. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? . . .
You should see the “End of Break” screen on your computer. Please
confirm that your name appears on the screen, then click on “Information
is Correct.” You will be at the screen titled “Resuming Exam.” Do not touch
your keyboard until I tell you. I have more instructions to give you. In a
moment, you will begin working on the free-response section of the exam
which includes Writing and Speaking. You will not all finish the exam at
the same time. Again, at various points, you will be asked to check your
headsets and microphone volume levels and to perform various tasks.
Follow the instructions carefully. Are there any questions? . . .
After you complete the free-response section of the exam, there will be a
screen that asks you to grant the College Board the right to use your exam
responses. You must answer “Yes” or “No.” When you have completed
that screen, the exam is finished. It is critical that you do not touch the
keyboard or anything on the computer after you have completed this task.
The computer will be processing your exam responses. Sit quietly at your
workstation until I give you further instructions. You may not leave the
testing room. Are there any questions? . . .
You may now click “Next” and resume testing. . . .
58
AP Exam Instructions
Once all students have resumed testing, you should continue to circulate to ensure exam
security. When all students have completed testing, say:
I will now collect your scratch paper. Remain in your seat, without talking,
while this material is collected. Do not touch the keyboard or you may lose
all of your responses.
Ensure that you have received three sheets of scratch paper from each student. When all
materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic devices you
may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
After students are dismissed, follow the procedures for returning exam results. See Post-Exam
Activities on pages 116–117 of the 2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual and page 124 of the AP
Coordinator’s Manual regarding instructions for the Fee Reduction/Section Designation form.
Exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program after
your school’s last administration.
59
CHINESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
AP® Computer Science A Exam
Computer Science A
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday morning, May 3, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 40*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 4
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Note: The language used on the exam will be
Java. The Java Quick Reference is included in
the exam booklets.
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday morning, May 3, and you will be taking the AP Computer Science
A Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Computer Science
A Exam.
60
AP Exam Instructions
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled.
The Java Quick Reference is located inside the front cover of the booklet. You have 1
hour and 30 minutes for Section I. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your exam booklet and put your answer sheet on your
desk, face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label
on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
61
COMPUTER SCIENCE A
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Computer Science A
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area of
your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over the
back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face up. . . .
I will now collect your Section I booklet.
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
62
AP Exam Instructions
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for Section II. You must write your answers in
the exam booklet using a No. 2 pencil. You are responsible for pacing yourself
and may proceed freely from one question to the next. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each sheet of paper you use, be
sure to write only your AP number and the question number you are working
on. Do not write your name. The Java Quick Reference is located inside the front
cover of the booklet. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
Note Start Time here
20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
. Note Stop Time here
. After 1 hour and
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
63
COMPUTER SCIENCE A
12
Computer Science A
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
64
AP® Macroeconomics Exam
AP Exam Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 11, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 10 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr.
AP® Microeconomics Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday morning, May 13, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 10 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 10 minutes
Calculator not permitted
Number of Questions: 60*
Percent of Total Score: 66.67%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
Total Time: 1 hour
Calculator not permitted
Number of Questions: 3 required freeresponse questions
(10-minute reading period, 50-minute
writing period)
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Percent of Total Score: 33.33%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
65
ECONOMICS
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Economics
Macroeconomics
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 11, and you will be taking the
AP Macroeconomics Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the
AP Macroeconomics Exam.
Microeconomics
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday morning, May 13, and you will be taking the
AP Microeconomics Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the
AP Microeconomics Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out
the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
66
AP Exam Instructions
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or
any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Calculators are not
allowed on any part of this exam. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 10 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
67
ECONOMICS
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Economics
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
68
AP Exam Instructions
The total Section II time is 1 hour. This includes a 10-minute reading period.
The reading period is designed to provide you with time to develop
thoughtful, well-organized responses. You are advised to take advantage of
the reading period to plan what you will write. You may begin writing your
exam responses before the reading period is over. You may make notes on
page 3 and the pages that contain the exam questions, but your responses
must be written on the designated lined pages. Are there any questions? . . .
You are responsible for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one
question to the next. You must write your answers in the Section II booklet
using a pen with black or dark blue ink. You are not permitted to use other
colored pens or pencils to draw graphs or diagrams. If you need more paper
to complete your responses, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet
of paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number, and
• the question number you are working on.
Make sure to begin your response on the lined page directly following
the first appearance of the question and continue your response on the
additional lined pages that follow. Remember to write your answers on the
lined pages provided for each question; only responses written on the lined
pages will be scored.
You may now open the Section II booklet and begin the 10-minute
reading period.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 10 minutes, say:
The reading period is over. You have 50 minutes remaining to complete
Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in their exam booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
69
ECONOMICS
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Economics
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
70
AP® English Language and Composition Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 11, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. Section II Total Time: 2 hr. 15 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour
Number of Questions: 54*
Percent of Total Score: 45%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
Total Time: 2 hours 15 minutes
Number of Questions: 3 essays
(15-minute reading period, 2-hour writing
period)
Percent of Total Score: 55%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 11, and you will be taking the AP English Language
and Composition Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the AP English Language
and Composition Exam.
71
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMPOSITION
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
English Language and Composition
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open
your answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 50 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
72
AP Exam Instructions
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
After the break, say:
.
SECTION II: Free Response
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open either the Section II exam booklet or the orange Section II: Free
Response, Questions and Sources booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
73
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMPOSITION
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or
textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
English Language and Composition
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams
this year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack
under your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
exam booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
The total Section II time is 2 hours and 15 minutes. This includes a 15-minute
reading period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to
develop thoughtful, well-organized responses. During the reading period you
are advised to read Question 1, analyzing and evaluating the sources, and
planning your answer. You may read the other essay questions at this time. You
may begin writing your responses before the reading period is over. You may
make notes in the orange booklet, but your responses must be written in the
free-response booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink.
Write the number of the question you are working on in the box at the top
of each page in the exam booklet. If you need more paper to complete your
responses, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be
sure to write only:
• your AP number, and
• the question number you are working on.
You may now open the orange booklet and exam booklet and begin the
15-minute reading period.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
writing any notes in the orange booklet. After 15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
. Check that students are
The reading period is over. You have 2 hours remaining to complete Section II.
74
AP Exam Instructions
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in their exam booklets and not in their orange
booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to Question 2.
After 40 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 3.
After 30 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet and an orange booklet from each student. Check for the following:
• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
75
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMPOSITION
Stop working and close your exam booklet and orange booklet. Put your
exam booklet on your desk, face up. Put your orange booklet next to it.
Do not place your Section II exam booklet inside your orange booklet or
vice versa. . . .
English Language and Composition
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
!
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
materials. This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When
sorting exam materials for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the
Section II exam booklets. Do not place Section II exam booklets inside the orange
booklets or vice versa. The free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam
may not be discussed unless the questions are released on the College Board website
two days after the exam.
76
AP® English Literature and Composition
Exam
AP Exam Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 4, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday morning, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. Section II Total Time: 2 hr.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour
Number of Questions: 55*
Percent of Total Score: 45%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 2 hours
Number of Questions: 3 essays
Percent of Total Score: 55%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 4, and you will be taking the AP English Literature
and Composition Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday morning, May 20, and you will be taking the AP English Literature and
Composition Exam.
77
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND COMPOSITION
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
English Literature and Composition
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 50 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
78
AP Exam Instructions
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area of
your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over the
back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face up.
I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check to be sure that each student has signed the
front cover of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open either the Section II exam booklet or the orange Section II: Free
Response, Questions booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last initials
of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where indicated. This
constitutes your signature and your agreement to the statements on the
front cover. . . .
79
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND COMPOSITION
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during
the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email,
use a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication
device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiple-choice questions at
any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other students.
If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam score will
be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
English Literature and Composition
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
You have 2 hours to complete Section II. You are responsible for pacing
yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next. You may
make notes in the orange booklet, but no credit will be given for what is
written in the orange booklet. You must write your answers in the exam
booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink. Write the number of the
question you are working on in the box at the top of each page in the exam
booklet. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand. At the top
of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your AP number
and the question number you are working on. Do not write your name. Are
there any questions? . . .
You may now open the orange booklet and exam booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets and not in the orange booklets. After
40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to Question 2.
After 40 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 3.
After 30 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
80
AP Exam Instructions
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet and orange booklet. Put your
exam booklet on your desk, face up. Put your orange booklet next to it.
Do not place your Section II exam booklet inside your orange booklet or
vice versa. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Collect a Section II booklet and orange booklet from each student. Check for the following:
• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
81
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND COMPOSITION
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
English Literature and Composition
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
!materials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When
sorting exam materials for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the
Section II exam booklets. Do not place Section II exam booklets inside the orange
booklets or vice versa. The free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam
may not be discussed unless the questions are released on the College Board website
two days after the exam.
82
AP® Environmental Science Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday morning, May 2, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 100*
Percent of Total Score: 60%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
Note: Calculator not permitted
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: 4
Percent of Total Score: 40%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
Note: Calculator not permitted
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
!
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday morning, May 2, and you will be taking the AP Environmental
Science Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the AP Environmental
Science Exam.
83
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
Environmental Science
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or
any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Calculators are not
allowed. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students
are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
84
AP Exam Instructions
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
85
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break. All
items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay there, and
you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave your shrinkwrapped
Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are not allowed to consult
teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during the break. You may not make
phone calls, send text messages, check email, use a social networking site, or
access any electronic or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss
the multiple-choice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your
teacher and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
Environmental Science
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible
for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black
or dark blue ink. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand.
At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your AP
number and the question number you are working on. Do not write your name.
Calculators are not allowed. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
86
AP Exam Instructions
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
87
ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
AP® European History Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 6, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 45 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 45 minutes
Percent of Total Score: 60%
Part A:
Multiple-Choice questions
Number of Questions: 55*
Time: 55 minutes
Writing Instrument: Pencil
required
Part B:
Short-Answer questions
Number of Questions: 4
Time: 50 minutes
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
*The number of questions may
vary slightly depending on the form
of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: Documentbased question (DBQ) and 1 essay
(15-minute reading period, 75-minute
writing period)
Percent of Total Score: 40%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
88
AP Exam Instructions
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 6, and you will be taking the AP European
History Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 19, and you will be taking the AP European
History Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out
the two Section I booklets. One is labeled Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer, and the other is labeled Section I, Part B: Short Answer. Do
not open the Part B: Short Answer booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Place the Section I, Part B: Short Answer booklet and the seals
on top of the shrinkwrapped Section II exam materials, and set these aside
on your desk. You should now refer only to the Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer booklet and your answer sheet. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your Section I:
Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet cover. Place the label on page 1 of
your answer sheet on the light blue box near the top right-hand corner that
reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of the booklet and look up when
you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read the instructions.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Section I has two parts: Part A (multiple choice) and Part B (short answer).
You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice questions at any time
in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other students. If you
disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam score will be
canceled.
89
EUROPEAN HISTORY
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
European History
Put all pens aside. Open your answer sheet to page 2. The answer sheet has
circles marked A–E for each question. For European History, you will use only
the circles marked A–D. You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2
pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer
sheet, one response per question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need
to erase, do so carefully and completely. No credit will be given for anything
written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use
the margins or any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are
there any questions? . . .
You have 55 minutes for the multiple-choice questions. If you finish before
time is called, you may check your work, but do not go on to Part B until I
tell you to do so. Your answer sheets will be collected at the end of the
55 minutes. Open your booklet labeled Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Proctors should circulate
throughout the testing room to check that students are marking their answers in pencil on
their answer sheets and that they are not looking ahead to Part B or at the other exam booklets.
Proctors should stop any students who begin reading the Part B short-answer questions, or begin
writing in the Part B: Short Answer booklet (this booklet should remain on top of the Section II
shrinkwrapped packet). These students should be redirected back to the multiple-choice questions.
If students complete the multiple-choice questions early they may recheck their work on Part A or
sit quietly until you give the next instruction. After 45 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your exam booklet and put your answer sheet on your
desk, face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label
on page 1 of your answer sheet.
Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets. Do not reopen the exam booklet
until you are told to do so.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now put all pencils aside. Get your Student Pack from under your chair, and
get the Section I, Part B: Short Answer booklet that you set aside earlier.
Leave the seals and the shrinkwrapped Section II packet to the side. . . .
You should now have in front of you:
• Your Student Pack, and
• the two Section I booklets
The Section I, Part B: Short Answer booklet provides lined pages for your
responses. You must use a pen with black or dark blue ink so your responses
can be scored accurately.
Read the statements on the cover of the short-answer booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
90
AP Exam Instructions
Now, take an AP number label from the center of your Student Pack and
place it on the gray shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels,
write your AP number in the box. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. . . .
Part B of the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet contains
the short answer questions. You will write your responses in the shortanswer booklet. You must write your response to each question on the
lined page designated for the response to that question. Read the questions
carefully and respond to them concisely. Responses do not need to fill the
entire page. Longer responses will not necessarily receive higher scores
than shorter ones that accomplish all the tasks set by the question. Only
the responses on the designated pages of this booklet will be scored. Do
not write outside the box. You have 50 minutes for this part. Are there any
questions before we begin? . . .
Turn to Part B in the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet,
open the short-answer booklet, and begin working.
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
writing their answers in their Section I, Part B: Short Answer booklet within the boxes on the
lined pages designated for the questions. The booklet is designed to provide sufficient space for
responses. However, if a student requires additional space to complete responses, provide lined
paper. Instruct those students to write only their AP number, the exam section (Section I, Part B),
and the number of the question they are working on, at the top of each extra sheet of paper they
use. The shrinkwrapped Section II materials should still be on the side and unopened. After
40 minutes, say:
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close both booklets.
91
EUROPEAN HISTORY
12
9
European History
If any students used extra paper for a question in the short-answer part, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
I will now collect the short-answer booklet.
Collect a short-answer booklet from each student. Check for the following:
• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific short-answer questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time.
Now you must seal your Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet
using the white seals you set aside earlier. Remove the white seals from the
backing and press one on each area of your Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal
over the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your
desk, face up. I will now collect your Section I: Multiple Choice and Short
Answer booklet. . . .
Collect the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet from each student. Check that
all Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklets are sealed, and that students have
signed the front cover of the booklets.
There is a 10-minute break before beginning Section II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email, use
a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication device.
Remember, you may never discuss these specific multiple-choice questions
at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other
92
AP Exam Instructions
students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam
score will be canceled. Remember, you may not discuss any short-answer
questions unless they are released on the College Board website in about
two days. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
Section II (free-response) of this exam begins with a mandatory essay question (Question 1), then
gives students a choice of two essay topics (Question 2 or Question 3). A sheet of essay-choice labels
is included with the Section II free-response booklets. At the conclusion of the free-response
section, you will instruct students to apply the appropriate label where indicated on the front cover
of their Section II exam booklet, identifying their essay choice.
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open either the Section II exam booklet or the orange Section II Free
Response, Questions and Documents booklet until you are told to do so. Put
the essay-choice labels aside. You will need them at the end of Section II. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete the “Important
Identification Information” as you did on the short-answer booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another AP
Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year.
If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under your
chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the Section II: Free Response
booklet. Do not open the booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
93
EUROPEAN HISTORY
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
European History
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
The total Section II time is 1 hour and 30 minutes. This includes a 15-minute
reading period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to
develop thoughtful, well-organized responses. During the reading period
you are advised to read Question 1 and plan your answer. If you have time,
you may also read Questions 2 and 3. You may begin writing your responses
before the reading period is over. You may make notes in the orange booklet,
but your responses must be written in the free-response booklet using a
pen with black or dark blue ink. At the top of each page in the free-response
booklet, circle the number of the question you are answering.
The suggested writing time for Question 1 is 40 minutes. After 40 minutes,
you will be advised to move on to the next question. Questions 2 and 3 are
weighted equally; you won’t get extra credit for answering the question
that may seem more difficult. Choose the question for which you are
better prepared.
If you need more paper to complete your responses, raise your hand. At the
top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number,
• Section II, and
• the question number you are working on.
You may now open the orange booklet and exam booklet and begin the
15-minute reading period.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
The reading period is over. You have 1 hour and 15 minutes remaining to
complete Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in their exam booklets and not in the orange
booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to the next question. Answer either Question 2
or Question 3, but not both.
After 25 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close both booklets. Look at the bottom front cover of
your free-response booklet. Using the essay-choice labels that you set aside
earlier, select the label that matches the question you chose to answer
94
AP Exam Instructions
(Question 2 or Question 3), and apply it to the bottom front cover of your
exam booklet, where indicated. For example, if you answered Question 2
apply the label “2.” Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now put both booklets on your desk, face up. Do not place your Section II
exam booklet inside your orange booklet or vice versa. Put your unused labels
next to them. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet, an orange booklet, and the unused labels from each student. Check
for the following:
• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label and an essay-choice
label in the appropriate boxes and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
You may discard the essay-choice labels after you have checked that all students have applied one
label to each free-response booklet. When all exam materials have been collected and accounted
for, return to students any electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
95
EUROPEAN HISTORY
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
European History
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015 - 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
!materials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When
sorting exam materials for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the
Section II exam booklets. Do not place Section II exam booklets inside the orange
booklets or vice versa. The free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam
may not be discussed unless the questions are released on the College Board website
two days after the exam.
96
AP® French Language and Culture
Exam
AP Exam
Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday afternoon, May 10, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 35 min.
Section I
Total Time: Approx. 1 hour
35 minutes
Number of Questions: 65*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 28 min.
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks without audio stimuli
Tasks with audio stimuli
Time: 40 minutes
Time: approximately
55 minutes
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks with written responses
Tasks with spoken responses
Time: approximately
70 minutes
Time: approximately
18 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hour
28 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each
testing room
• Master Persuasive Essay/Speaking
Double CD set for each testing room
• One CD player with external speakers
for each testing room
• Student-response tapes or CDs
• If recording student responses using a
tape recorder:
– Student response tapes, and
– Tape recorders with microphone
• If recording student responses
digitally:
– Computers, work stations, or
handheld digital recording devices in
sealable quart-size plastic storage bags
• Answer sheets
• AP Student Packs
•
•
•
•
NEW: School-owned handheld digital recording devices that meet the acceptable criteria on
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital may be used for recording students’
responses for Part B of Section II of the AP French Language and Culture Exam.
97
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
French Language and Culture
Before exam day, the AP Coordinator should determine how best to administer the French
Language and Culture free-response section. The AP Coordinator should review the options
described in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual and choose the best option based on your
school’s resources and the number of students testing. The instructions that follow are based
on administering the exam in the standard sequence. The Email Reply task, Persuasive Essay
task, and Speaking part have been labeled to aid proctors using options other than the standard
sequence; you may find it helpful to note the sequence of the selected option in the margins of
these pages. Also, keep in mind the following:
•• Section I must be administered first regardless of the sequence in which you administer
the parts of Section II.
•• Make sure students do not open the sealed orange booklets until they are told to do so.
•• Collect students’ exam materials before moving to other rooms and redistribute them in the
new room.
•• Collect Student Packs only at the completion of all testing.
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed
on testing day. See “AP French, German, Italian, and Spanish Language and Culture Exams” in
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. We strongly encourage schools to
provide students with multiple opportunities throughout the year to practice making recordings
using the method that will be used on exam day.
You will need the master listening CD for Section I, Part B. You will also need the double CD set,
which contains the master CDs for the Persuasive Essay task and the Speaking part for Section II.
A list of tracks for all master audio CDs is available at the end of these instructions. A blank
student-response tape or CD is provided for each student taking the exam. It’s a good idea to
have extra blank tapes or CDs on hand.
If you plan to administer the speaking part of this exam:
• using a tape recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 104 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• in a digital language lab, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 106 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• using a computer with MP3 recording software, use the instructions for the speaking
part beginning on page 109 of this AP Exam Instructions book. You may also go to
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator for helpful information, including a link to free
MP3 recording software† that can be used for administering AP world language and culture
and Music Theory exams on a PC or Mac computer. We strongly recommend that your
school’s technical consultant be involved in determining if this software program is right
for your school.
• using a handheld digital recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning
on page 112 of this AP Exam Instructions book (new this year). You may go to
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital to review the criteria
that handheld digital recorders must meet to comply with AP Program policies.
This is not an AP Program or ETS endorsement of this product. If you experience any problems
during the installation or configuration of this software product only, technical assistance is
available between 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. ET, Monday through Friday. Your school staff can email
AP-MP3Recordertech@ets.org, or call 609-406-5677 for assistance during these hours.
†
98
AP Exam Instructions
IMPORTANT: For AP Exams, the only acceptable digital file format is MP3 when recording
using a digital lab, computer, or handheld digital recorder. It is very important that your
students practice recording MP3 files. Practice materials are available from the Exam
Information page on AP Central. Refer also to “Saving and Naming MP3 Files” on page 116
of this AP Exam Instructions book.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
! General Instructions for your group.
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 91–92).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday afternoon, May 10, and you will be taking the AP French Language
and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up
when you have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The instructions inside the exam booklets are in English and French.
Choose the language you are more comfortable with; do not spend time
reading both.
99
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the AP French Language
and Culture Exam.
French Language and Culture
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For French
Language and Culture, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must
complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Section I takes approximately 1 hour and 35 minutes and is divided into two
parts. You will have 40 minutes for Section I, Part A. When you are finished,
you may check your work but you may not move on to Part B until you are told
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
12
Open your Section I booklet and begin.
Note Start Time for Part A here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that
6
students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are only working
on Part A, as indicated by the letter A across the top of each page. After 30 minutes, say:
9
3
There are 10 minutes remaining for Part A.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working.
Turn on the CD player and insert the master listening CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to
adjust the volume and then stop the CD. Say:
You will have approximately 55 minutes for Part B.
12
I will not stop the CD until the end of Part B. Turn to Part B in your exam
booklet and wait for the recording to begin. Raise your hand if you do not hear
the recording.
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time for Part B here
. Note Stop Time
here
. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets
and that they are only working on the pages that correspond to Part B, as indicated by the letter B
across the top of each page. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning Part B, you will hear “End
of recording.” At that point, stop the CD player, remove the master listening CD from the CD
player, and say:
9
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Read Item Q on your answer
sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles and look up when you have finished. . . .
Give students 1 minute to complete Item Q. Then say:
Put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make sure your AP number label
and AP Exam label are on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I
collect your answer sheets.
100
AP Exam Instructions
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that an AP number label and an AP Exam
label have been applied to page 1. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but don’t
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
orange booklet aside; you will need it for Part B. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II exam
booklet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels write your AP number
in the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
101
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
French Language and Culture
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. Read the information on the
back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the exam booklet or break the
seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You may use any blank space to organize your thoughts and for scratch
work, but you must write your responses on the lined pages in the exam
booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you
use, be sure to write only your AP number and the number of the task you
are working on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
START
Task 1: Email Reply
Say:
You have 15 minutes to complete Task 1, the Email Reply task.
You may work only on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated
by the number 1 across the top of each page. You may review your
response if you finish before the end of Task 1 is announced but you may
not go on to Task 2. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your exam booklet to Part A, Task 1, and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that
students are using pens and that they are working only on the pages that correspond to
Task 1. After 15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
Stop working.
END
Task 1: Email Reply
102
AP Exam Instructions
START
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
Turn on the CD player and insert the master CD for Task 2, the Persuasive Essay task. Play
the first sentence of Track 1 of the CD so that you can adjust the volume, and then stop the
CD. Then say:
You have approximately 55 minutes to complete Task 2, the Persuasive
Essay task.
Turn to Part A, Task 2, in your exam booklet. You will be working now on
the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated by the number 2 across
the top of each page.
Please wait for the recording to begin. I will not stop the CD until the end.
If you finish your work on Task 2 before time is called, you may check your
responses for both Task 1 and Task 2.
Are there any questions? . . .
Raise your hand if you do not hear the recording.
12
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Put your Section II exam
booklet on your desk, face up. Keep the sealed orange booklet; you will
need it for Part B, Speaking.
END
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those
students staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their
exam booklets. Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for
multiple students per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of
the required information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in
an Incident Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for
complete details). Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from every student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
103
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time
here
. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning the task, you will hear “End
of recording.” At that point, stop the CD player. Then say:
9
French Language and Culture
START
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
Use the following instructions if students are recording their responses on a blank
student-response tape.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration of
Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to outside
interference.
TA PE
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON TAPE
When you are ready, say:
I’m going to give each of you a tape for recording your responses.
Give each student a blank student-response tape. Then say:
Remove the shrinkwrap and take the tape out of its case. . . .
An AP number label has to be put on your tape. Get your Student Pack from
under your chair and take out an AP number label. . . .
Without covering the tape spool, put the label on the front in the space
indicated. Your tape will not be scored if your AP number is not on the tape. . . .
Unless you check the “No” box on the tape, you give permission to the
College Board to use your recorded responses for educational research and
instructional purposes. Now put the tape in your tape recorder, with Side 1
facing out. . . .
When all tapes are in position, say:
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so.
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. . . .
104
AP Exam Instructions
TA PE
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on
your desk except a pen, tape recorder and orange booklet. . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
I am now going to ask you to record your AP number, and we’ll test to
make sure everything is working. Check that your tape is on Side 1. Use the
fast forward button to advance the tape beyond the colored leader portion.
When I tell you to, start recording and say, “My AP number is . . .” and
record your AP number in English. Then stop your tape recorder. Go ahead
and record. . . .
Now rewind your tape and play back what you recorded. After you have
heard your voice clearly saying your complete AP number, stop your
tape recorder. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording or if you have trouble
with your equipment, raise your hand. I will not replay the recording if you
don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the recording unless the
equipment fails. You must not stop or pause your tape unless the recording
tells you to do so. You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t
open it until I tell you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the CD player. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Check that students are operating the equipment properly and that students are not
pausing and stopping their recorders unless they are instructed to do so by the voice on
the recording.
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their tapes to be
sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material. When you hear the words
“End of recording,” stop the master CD.
When all students have rewound their tapes and removed them from the tape
recorders, say:
If you recorded on Side 2 of the tape, check the box on the tape label that
reads “Check here if Side 2.”. . .
105
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
French Language and Culture
TA PE
You may now put the tape in its case. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk next
to your orange booklet and tape. Remain in your seat, without talking, while
the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each tape for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their tape before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. If a student recorded on Side 2 of the tape, complete an Incident
Report Form. On the Incident Report Form select “Other” as the type of incident, and
complete the “Incident Detail–Explanation” area. Now go to page 115 to continue with
instructions for dismissing students.
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP French Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until they are copied later to individual CDs.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses in a digital
language lab. The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam
responses when recording using a digital language lab. At various points, there will be
two sets of instructions: one if students can control their own recordings, and one if you or
another proctor controls student recordings from a master console. Follow the instructions
accordingly.
Before students enter the digital language lab, set up the room following your lab
manufacturer’s instructions. Isolate the student stations as necessary to ensure that students
are directed only to the stations being used. From the console, make sure that all student
stations are on and the correct recording and save file format are activated.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the
master recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
106
AP Exam Instructions
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
DIGITAL
LAB
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES IN A DIGITAL
LANGUAGE LAB
Once the students enter the room, direct them to the appropriate stations. Instruct students
to put on their headsets and adjust their microphones. When you are ready to begin, say:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will be
transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a pen,
and your Student Pack? . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Also, write the number of the station at which you are sitting
so your files can be saved accurately. Now write your name under your
station number. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes. Are there
any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, and
your CD. . . .
Read the following if students can control their recordings:
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses
at a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
107
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case.
Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the
front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange
booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
French Language and Culture
DIGITAL
LAB
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice
has recorded properly. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may
make it appear that you did not record or complete your response and
could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
Read the following if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a
master console:
Your recordings will be started, paused, and stopped from this console.
You will not need to do anything when you hear these instructions. You
should record your responses at a normal speaking level.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may
make it appear that you did not record or complete your response and
could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English.
Start the student recordings and say:
Go ahead and say your AP number. . . .
Once all students have spoken their AP numbers, pause the recordings and say:
Sit quietly while I check that you’ve recorded your AP numbers and that
your voices have recorded properly.
Check that students’ AP numbers have recorded properly.
Continue for all administrations:
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not stop
the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes in the orange
booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End
of recording.”
108
AP Exam Instructions
DIGITAL
LAB
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their recordings to
be sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material.
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk next
to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack only if you
are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files. Now
go to page 115 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
START
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP French Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until you copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a computer,
using MP3 recording software. Be aware of the requirements for recording student
responses using a computer:
1.School-owned laptops may be used only if they remain in the school at all times and are
not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned laptops may not be used
under any circumstances.
2.
The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses when
recording using a computer. Check your software well before the exam administration to
be sure it is capable of recording and saving in MP3 format. If not, please use the software
program described on www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
3.Each student’s responses must be recorded as one MP3 file. Therefore, for most
software packages, the “STOP” button should not be pressed until the speaking part
is finished. Pressing “STOP” before recording is finished may create two files and
overwrite earlier work.
4.Each student’s recorded file must begin with his or her AP number. If you use the
student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to record
it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
109
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
END
French Language and Culture
5. Your exam shipment will contain a student response CD for each student.
Before students enter the room, make sure all computers are on and that the correct
recording and save file format are activated.
COMPUTER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON A COMPUTER
WITH MP3 SOFTWARE
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will be
transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a pen,
and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case. Now
close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the front
cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet
until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes. Are there
any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, and
your CD. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses. You
should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to do
so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses at a
normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure everything
is working properly. Now put on your headset or move the microphone to
the best position to achieve a good recording level. When I tell you to, say,
“My AP number is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead and
record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice has
recorded properly. Click the “PLAY” button to replay this test recording. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
110
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
Please delete your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I
will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will
not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. Remember to use the
“PAUSE” button when you are instructed to do so.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
MPORTANT: If your MP3 recording software requires students to deselect
! Ithe
“PAUSE” button before they can continue their recording, you must remind
them to do so. If they do not follow the correct recording process for your software,
their files may not record properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words
“End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say: If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file. You
should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice has been
recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand
and I will help you. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk next
to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack only if you
are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files.
END
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
111
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
French Language and Culture
START
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES USING A
HANDHELD DIGITAL RECORDER
Be aware of the requirements for recording student responses using a handheld digital
recorder:
1.School-owned handheld digital recorders may be used if they remain in the school at
all times and are not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned devices
may not be used under any circumstances.
2.If the device includes features for wireless communication over a network —
including cellular, Bluetooth®, or WiFi — the communication capability MUST be
disabled.
3.If the device includes features for taking pictures or video such as a built-in camera or
webcam, the camera or webcam MUST be disabled.
4.
The device MUST be capable of saving the recorded audio as an MP3 formatted
digital file. No other audio file format (e.g., WAV, WMA, or AAC) is acceptable.
5.The device MUST have the ability to record (begin the recording), stop (stop/end the
recording), and pause/unpause (temporarily suspend the recording and then continue
recording). The stop (or a separate save) control should create a digital file that
contains the recording.
6.The device MUST include a means to move or copy digital files from the device to an
external computer. Most devices do so via a USB port and cable or removable media
(SD card); either is acceptable.
7.Each student’s recorded response must begin with his or her AP number. If you use
the student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to
record it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student
responses. In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP French Language Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II
free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses
in this folder until you copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
112
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Consider the following suggestion for keeping track of student responses (this is a best
practice, not a requirement):
Figure 1
Before students enter the room, place each
handheld digital recorder in its own sealable
quart-size plastic storage bag. Have students
place their AP number label on the bag in the
order in which they record, if applicable (so that
the second student places his or her AP number
label below the first student’s AP number label
and so on) and write their sequence number in
the far left margin of the label. (See Figure 1.)
Instructions:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will be
transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a handheld digital recorder, a
sealed orange booklet, a pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case. Now
close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the front
cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet
until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, your
CD, and a handheld digital recorder. . . .
113
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
After a student finishes using a device, lock that
student’s response file if the device permits you
to do so. When the exam is over, put the device
back into the bag. The person responsible for
transferring the student responses from the
device to a computer and then saving the files
will have the students’ AP numbers.
French Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses. You
should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to do
so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses at a
normal speaking level. Does everyone know how to use the controls and
buttons on the device to record, pause, stop, and erase? If not, please raise
your hand. . . .
!
IMPORTANT: In some models of handheld digital recorders, the “PAUSE” button
is combined with the “PLAY” button. In others, it is combined with the “RECORD”
button. If you don’t see any buttons labeled “PAUSE,” it is very possible that the
“RECORD” button acts as a pause. Be sure that you and the students understand how to
record, pause, stop, and erase using your school’s specific devices before moving on. If
students do not follow the correct recording process, their files may not record properly,
and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, press the “RECORD”
button and say, “My AP number is . . .,” speak your AP number in English,
and then press the “STOP” button. Go ahead and record your AP number
now. . . .
Play your test recording to check that you’ve recorded your AP number and
that your voice has recorded properly. Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please erase your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
stop the recording unless the equipment fails.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
From this point on, you will stop the recording only once, at the very end of
testing. Remember to press the “PAUSE” button between your recordings
when instructed to do so. Let’s record your AP number now. When you
have finished, press the “PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record
your AP number now. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
114
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file. Play
your recording to make sure that your voice has been recorded. In the event
that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will help you. . . .
! information
needed to match the student responses with the correct AP numbers.
Confirm that each student’s AP number label is on the bag holding the recorder he or
IMPORTANT: Before dismissing the students, you must be sure to have the
she used.
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet, handheld digital recorder, and CD. You may
keep your Student Pack only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are
collected. . . .
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
Dismissing Students
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any
electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with
anyone unless they are released on the College Board website in about two
days. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any
way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
115
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. Check each CD
for the student’s AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to
have them put an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they
will not receive credit for their responses. You will require this information for saving
MP3 files.
French Language and Culture
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School
Use Only” section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject score
roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the 2015-16
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain
seating charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be
retained for a longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their
exam shipments unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
! materials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. The freeIMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
response questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed unless the
questions are released on the College Board website two days after the exam.
END
START
Dismissing Students
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
SAVING AND NAMING MP3 FILES AND PREPARING
STUDENT-RESPONSE CDs FOR RETURN
When students have been dismissed, begin the process of saving the files for return to the
AP Program.
Saving and Naming Files: Digital Language Lab
Follow the lab manufacturer’s directions for collecting and saving each student’s file. Some
labs automatically name the files according to the student station number. If this is the
case, you must rename each file with the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the
student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3).
You may need to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Computer with MP3 Software
Follow your software manufacturer’s directions for exporting and saving each student’s
file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name should only have the student’s
8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the
file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need to play the beginning of the
recording to check the AP number.
116
AP Exam Instructions
Saving and Naming Files: Handheld Digital Recorder
Follow your device manufacturer’s directions for connecting the device to a computer and
transferring each student’s file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name should
only have the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange booklet and
CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need to play the
beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Burning Files to CDs: All Digital Recording Methods
For this exam, the folder to which you save the files should be named “2016 AP French
Language and Culture Exam, [Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the
front cover of the Section II free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner.
Do not save responses to individual questions as separate files. Save the entire student
response as a single file. Do not save any other student identification on the file.
Review each student’s orange booklet to identify any students who did not grant permission
to the College Board to reproduce the recorded material. Students who did not wish to
grant permission were instructed to write “NO” on the orange booklet. Using a permanent
marker, make a check mark on the CD next to “NO” for any students who did not grant
permission.
Make sure the student’s AP number label is on the CD. Place the CD in the case. Once the
students’ responses have been successfully copied to their CDs, delete their files from
the master console or server.
117
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
After all students’ responses have been saved and renamed (if needed), copy each student’s
MP3 file onto his or her CD. Do not include more than one student’s responses on any CD.
Use one CD per student with all of that student’s responses in one file in order to facilitate
proper scoring. This also ensures that the responses are processed and scored in the same
manner as the tapes.
•• When burning each student’s MP3 file to the provided student-response CD, be
sure to select “Data Disc” or “Data CD” (not “Audio Disc” or “Audio CD”) in the
preferences of your CD-burning application.
•• Do not use applications such as Windows Media Player or iTunes versions that
only allow burning audio discs or CDs. This will help ensure that your students’
responses can be accessed for scoring.
•• If you recorded on computers using MP3 software, you must select to finalize or
close the CD after burning the file to the CD, using the same software you used
to burn the files. CDs that are not finalized or closed may NOT play on other
computers. Please refer to the software user guide to properly finalize the CD or
close the CD, which will instruct the software to complete the burning session on
the CD.
Check each CD, making sure that the MP3 file has been burned to the CD and
that the file can be played. Failure to properly burn students’ MP3 files to CD
may result in a score delay or an exam part score of zero. It is imperative that you
ensure students’ MP3 files are properly burned to CD, with the burning sessions
completed, in accordance with your software requirements, and that the files be
present and audible on every CD you return for scoring.
French Language and Culture
Do not save the content of the master CDs to your school’s computer network server or to a
computer’s hard drive.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Refer to page 116 for the tasks you need to
complete before storing materials.
END
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
118
AP Exam Instructions
Following is the list of tracks for the master listening CD, the master CD for the Persuasive Essay
task, and the master speaking CD. This list may be used in the following instances:
(1) If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2) The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master CD for Persuasive Essay Task: Tracks for the Persuasive Essay Task of AP French
Language and Culture Exam
Track 1:
Track 2:
Track 3:
Directions: Task 2
Task 2
Directions: End of Part A
Master Speaking CD: Tracks for the Speaking Part of AP French Language and Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part B
Track 2:
Directions: Task 3
Track 3: Task 3
Track 4:
Task 3a
Track 5:
Task 3b
Track 6:
Task 3c
Track 7:
Task 3d
Track 8:
Task 3e
Track 9:
Directions: End of Task 3
Track 10:
Directions: Task 4
Track 11:
Task 4
Track 12:
Directions: End of Part B
119
FRENCH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Listening Part of AP French Language and Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part B
Track 2:
Selection 1
Tracks 3–12:
Questions 31–40
Track 13:
Selection 2
Tracks 14–20:
Questions 41–47
Track 21:
Selection 3
Tracks 22–26:
Questions 48–52
Track 27:
Selection 4
Tracks 28–32:
Questions 53–57
Track 33:
Selection 5
Tracks 34–41:
Questions 58–65
Track 42:
Directions: End of Part B
AP® German Language and Culture Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday morning, May 6, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 35 min.
Section I
Total Time: Approx. 1 hour
35 minutes
Number of Questions: 65*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 28 min.
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks without audio stimuli
Tasks with audio stimuli
Time: 40 minutes
Time: approximately
55 minutes
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks with written responses
Tasks with spoken responses
Time: approximately
70 minutes
Time: approximately
18 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hour 28 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each
testing room
• Master Persuasive Essay/Speaking
Double CD set for each testing room
• One CD player with external speakers
for each testing room
• Student-response tapes or CDs
• If recording student responses using a
tape recorder:
– Student response tapes, and
– Tape recorders with microphone
• If recording student responses digitally:
– Computers, work stations, or
handheld digital recording devices
in sealable quart-size plastic storage
bags
• Answer sheets
•
•
•
•
•
AP Student Packs
2015 - 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
NEW: School-owned handheld digital recording devices that meet the acceptable criteria on
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital may be used for recording students’
responses for Part B of Section II of the AP German Language and Culture Exam.
Before exam day, the AP Coordinator should determine how best to administer the German
Language and Culture free-response section. The AP Coordinator should review the options
described in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual and choose the best option based on your
school’s resources and the number of students testing. The instructions that follow are based
on administering the exam in the standard sequence. The Email Reply task, Persuasive Essay
120
AP Exam Instructions
task, and Speaking part have been labeled to aid proctors using options other than the standard
sequence; you may find it helpful to note the sequence of the selected option in the margins of
these pages. Also, keep in mind the following:
• Section I must be administered first regardless of the sequence in which you administer the
parts of Section II.
• Make sure students do not open the sealed orange booklets until they are told to do so.
• Collect students’ exam materials before moving to other rooms and redistribute them in the
new room.
• Collect Student Packs only at the completion of all testing.
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed
on testing day. See “AP French, German, Italian, and Spanish Language and Culture Exams” in
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. We strongly encourage schools to
provide students with multiple opportunities throughout the year to practice making recordings
using the method that will be used on exam day.
If you plan to administer the speaking part of this exam:
• using a tape recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 126 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• in a digital language lab, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 129 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• using a computer with MP3 recording software, use the instructions for the speaking
part beginning on page 132 of this AP Exam Instructions book. You may also go to
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator for helpful information, including a link to free
MP3 recording software† that can be used for administering AP world language and culture
and Music Theory exams on a PC or Mac computer. We strongly recommend that your
school’s technical consultant be involved in determining if this software program is right for
your school.
• using a handheld digital recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning
on page 134 of this AP Exam Instructions book (new this year). You may go to
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital to review the criteria that
handheld digital recorders must meet to comply with AP Program policies.
This is not an AP Program or ETS endorsement of this product. If you experience any problems
during the installation or configuration of this software product only, technical assistance is
available between 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. ET, Monday through Friday. Your school staff can email
AP-MP3Recordertech@ets.org, or call 609-406-5677 for assistance during these hours.
†
IMPORTANT: For AP Exams, the only acceptable digital file format is MP3 when recording
using a digital lab, computer, or handheld digital recorder. It is very important that your
students practice recording MP3 files. Practice materials are available from the Exam
Information page on AP Central. Refer also to “Saving and Naming MP3 Files” on page 139
of this AP Exam Instructions book.
121
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
You will need the master listening CD for Section I, Part B. You will also need the double CD set,
which contains the master CDs for the Persuasive Essay task and the Speaking part for Section II.
A list of tracks for all master audio CDs is available at the end of these instructions. A blank
student-response tape or CD is provided for each student taking the exam. It’s a good idea to have
extra blank tapes or CDs on hand.
German Language and Culture
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
o not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! DGeneral
Instructions for your group.
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions.
See the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 91–92).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday morning, May 6, and you will be taking the AP German Language
and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the AP German Language
and Culture Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The instructions inside the exam booklets are in English and German.
Choose the language you are more comfortable with; do not spend time
reading both.
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
122
AP Exam Instructions
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For German
Language and Culture, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must
complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Section I takes approximately 1 hour and 35 minutes and is divided into two
parts. You will have 40 minutes for Section I, Part A. When you are finished,
you may check your work but you may not move on to Part B until you are
told to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time for Part A here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that
6
students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are only
working on Part A, as indicated by the letter A across the top of each page. After 30 minutes, say:
9
3
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working.
Turn on the CD player and insert the master listening CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to
adjust the volume and then stop the CD. Say:
You will have approximately 55 minutes for Part B.
I will not stop the CD until the end of Part B. Turn to Part B in your exam
booklet and wait for the recording to begin. Raise your hand if you do not
hear the recording.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time for Part B here
. Note Stop
Time here
. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer
sheets and that they are only working on the pages that correspond to Part B, as indicated by the
letter B across the top of each page. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning Part B, you will
hear “End of recording.” At that point, stop the CD player, remove the master listening CD from
the CD player, and say:
9
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Read Item Q on your answer
sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles and look up when you have finished. . . .
Give students 1 minute to complete Item Q. Then say:
Put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make sure your AP number
label and AP Exam label are on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while
I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that an AP number label and an AP Exam
label have been applied to page 1. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
123
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
There are 10 minutes remaining for Part A.
German Language and Culture
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but don’t
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
orange booklet aside; you will need it for Part B. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II exam
booklet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels write your AP number
in the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
124
AP Exam Instructions
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. Read the information on
the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the exam booklet or break
the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You may use any blank space to organize your thoughts and for scratch
work, but you must write your responses on the lined pages in the exam
booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you
use, be sure to write only your AP number and the number of the task you
are working on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
START
Task 1: Email Reply
You have 15 minutes to complete Task 1, the Email Reply task.
You may work only on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated
by the number 1 across the top of each page. You may review your
response if you finish before the end of Task 1 is announced but you may
not go on to Task 2. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your exam booklet to Part A, Task 1, and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that
students are using pens and that they are working only on the pages that correspond to
Task 1. After 15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
Stop working.
END
START
Task 1: Email Reply
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
Turn on the CD player and insert the master CD for Task 2, the Persuasive Essay task. Play
the first sentence of Track 1 of the CD so that you can adjust the volume, and then stop the
CD. Then say:
You have approximately 55 minutes to complete Task 2, the Persuasive
Essay task.
Turn to Part A, Task 2, in your exam booklet. You will be working now on
the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated by the number 2 across
the top of each page.
125
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Say:
German Language and Culture
Please wait for the recording to begin. I will not stop the CD until the end.
If you finish your work on Task 2 before time is called, you may check your
responses for both Task 1 and Task 2.
Are there any questions? . . .
Raise your hand if you do not hear the recording.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time
here
. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning the task, you will hear “End of
recording.” At that point, stop the CD player. Then say:
9
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Put your Section II exam
booklet on your desk, face up. Keep the sealed orange booklet; you will
need it for Part B, Speaking.
END
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students per
exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required information
is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident Report return
envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details). Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from every student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
START
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
Use the following instructions if students are recording their responses on a blank
student-response tape.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
126
AP Exam Instructions
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
TA PE
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON TAPE
When you are ready, say:
I’m going to give each of you a tape for recording your responses.
Give each student a blank student-response tape. Then say:
Remove the shrinkwrap and take the tape out of its case. . . .
An AP number label has to be put on your tape. Get your Student Pack from
under your chair and take out an AP number label. . . .
Without covering the tape spool, put the label on the front in the space
indicated. Your tape will not be scored if your AP number is not on
the tape. . . .
When all tapes are in position, say:
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so.
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. . . .
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on your desk
except a pen, tape recorder and orange booklet. . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
I am now going to ask you to record your AP number, and we’ll test to
make sure everything is working. Check that your tape is on Side 1. Use the
fast forward button to advance the tape beyond the colored leader portion.
When I tell you to, start recording and say, “My AP number is . . .” and
record your AP number in English. Then stop your tape recorder. Go ahead
and record. . . .
Now rewind your tape and play back what you recorded. After you have
heard your voice clearly saying your complete AP number, stop your
tape recorder. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
127
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Unless you check the “No” box on the tape, you give permission to the
College Board to use your recorded responses for educational research and
instructional purposes. Now put the tape in your tape recorder, with Side 1
facing out. . . .
German Language and Culture
TA PE
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording or if you have trouble
with your equipment, raise your hand. I will not replay the recording if you
don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the recording unless the
equipment fails. You must not stop or pause your tape unless the recording
tells you to do so. You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t
open it until I tell you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the CD player. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Check that students are operating the equipment properly and that students are not
pausing and stopping their recorders unless they are instructed to do so by the voice on
the recording.
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their tapes to be
sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material. When you hear the words
“End of recording,” stop the master CD.
When all students have rewound their tapes and removed them from the tape
recorders, say:
If you recorded on Side 2 of the tape, check the box on the tape label that
reads “Check here if Side 2.”. . .
You may now put the tape in its case. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and tape. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each tape for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their tape before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. If a student recorded on Side 2 of the tape, complete an Incident
Report Form. On the Incident Report Form select “Other” as the type of incident, and
complete the “Incident Detail–Explanation” area. Now go to page 137 to continue with
instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
128
AP Exam Instructions
START
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP German Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until they are copied later to individual CDs.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses in a digital language
lab. The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses
when recording using a digital language lab. At various points, there will be two sets of
instructions: one if students can control their own recordings, and one if you or another
proctor controls student recordings from a master console. Follow the instructions accordingly.
Before students enter the digital language lab, set up the room following your lab
manufacturer’s instructions. Isolate the student stations as necessary to ensure that students
are directed only to the stations being used. From the console, make sure that all student
stations are on and the correct recording and save file format are activated.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
DIGITAL
LAB
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES IN A
DIGITAL LANGUAGE LAB
Once the students enter the room, direct them to the appropriate stations. Instruct students
to put on their headsets and adjust their microphones. When you are ready to begin, say:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a pen,
and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case.
Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the
front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange
booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
129
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
German Language and Culture
DIGITAL
LAB
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record
your AP number. Also, write the number of the station at which you are
sitting so your files can be saved accurately. Now write your name under
your station number. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your
recorded responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, and
your CD. . . .
Read the following if students can control their recordings:
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your
responses at a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice
has recorded properly. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
Read the following if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a
master console:
Your recordings will be started, paused, and stopped from this console.
You will not need to do anything when you hear these instructions. You
should record your responses at a normal speaking level.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English.
130
AP Exam Instructions
DIGITAL
LAB
Start the student recordings and say:
Go ahead and say your AP number. . . .
Once all students have spoken their AP numbers, pause the recordings and say:
Sit quietly while I check that you’ve recorded your AP numbers and
that your voices have recorded properly.
Check that students’ AP numbers have recorded properly.
Continue for all administrations:
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I
will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will
not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes
in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you to do so. Are there
any questions? . . .
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their recordings to
be sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material.
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files. Now
go to page 137 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
131
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
German Language and Culture
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP German Language Exam, [Form __].” The
form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II free-response booklet
in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder until you
copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a computer,
using MP3 recording software. Be aware of the requirements for recording student
responses using a computer:
1.School-owned laptops may be used only if they remain in the school at all times and are
not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned laptops may not be used
under any circumstances.
2. Th
e MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses when
recording using a computer. Check your software well before the exam administration to
be sure it is capable of recording and saving in MP3 format. If not, please use the software
program described on www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
3.Each student’s responses must be recorded as one MP3 file. Therefore, for most software
packages, the “STOP” button should not be pressed until the speaking part is finished.
Pressing “STOP” before recording is finished may create two files and overwrite
earlier work.
4.Each student’s recorded file must begin with his or her AP number. If you use the
student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to record
it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
5. Your exam shipment will contain a student response CD for each student.
Before students enter the room, make sure all computers are on and that the correct
recording and save file format are activated.
COMPUTER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON A COMPUTER
WITH MP3 SOFTWARE
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a pen,
and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case.
Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the
front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange
booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record
your AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
132
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your
recorded responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet,
and your CD. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to
do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses at
a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number and we’ll test to make sure everything
is working properly. Now put on your headset or move the microphone to
the best position to achieve a good recording level. When I tell you to, say,
“My AP number is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead
and record. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please delete your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand.
I will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions.
I will not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. Remember to
use the “PAUSE” button when you are instructed to do so.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell
you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
If your MP3 recording software requires students to deselect
! ItheMPORTANT:
“PAUSE” button before they can continue their recording, you must remind
133
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice has
recorded properly. Click the “PLAY” button to replay this test recording. . . .
German Language and Culture
COMPUTER
them to do so. If they do not follow the correct recording process for your software,
their files may not record properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say: If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file.
You should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice has
been recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your
hand and I will help you. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files.
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES USING A
HANDHELD DIGITAL RECORDER
Be aware of the requirements for recording student responses using a handheld digital
recorder:
1.School-owned handheld digital recorders may be used if they remain in the school at
all times and are not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned devices
may not be used under any circumstances.
2.If the device includes features for wireless communication over a network —
including cellular, Bluetooth®, or WiFi — the communication capability MUST be
disabled.
3.If the device includes features for taking pictures or video such as a built-in camera or
webcam, the camera or webcam MUST be disabled.
4.
The device MUST be capable of saving the recorded audio as an MP3 formatted
digital file. No other audio file format (e.g., WAV, WMA, or AAC) is acceptable.
5.The device MUST have the ability to record (begin the recording), stop (stop/end the
recording), and pause/unpause (temporarily suspend the recording and then continue
recording). The stop (or a separate save) control should create a digital file that
contains the recording.
134
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
6.The device MUST include a means to move or copy digital files from the device to an
external computer. Most devices do so via a USB port and cable or removable media
(SD card); either is acceptable.
7.Each student’s recorded response must begin with his or her AP number. If you use
the student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to
record it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP German Language Exam, [Form __].”
The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II free-response
booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder
until you copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Consider the following suggestion for keeping track of student responses (this is a best
practice, not a requirement):
Figure 1
After a student finishes using a device, lock that
student’s response file if the device permits you
to do so. When the exam is over, put the device
back into the bag. The person responsible for
transferring the student responses from the
device to a computer and then saving the files
will have the students’ AP numbers.
Instructions:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will be
transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a handheld digital recorder, a
sealed orange booklet, a pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case. Now
close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the front
cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet
until you are told to do so. . . .
135
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Before students enter the room, place each
handheld digital recorder in its own sealable
quart-size plastic storage bag. Have students
place their AP number label on the bag in the
order in which they record, if applicable (so that
the second student places his or her AP number
label below the first student’s AP number label
and so on) and write their sequence number in
the far left margin of the label. (See Figure 1.)
German Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, your
CD, and a handheld digital recorder. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses. You
should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to do
so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses at a
normal speaking level. Does everyone know how to use the controls and
buttons on the device to record, pause, stop, and erase? If not, please raise
your hand. . . .
! isbutton.
combined with the “PLAY” button. In others, it is combined with the “RECORD”
If you don’t see any buttons labeled “PAUSE,” it is very possible that the
IMPORTANT: In some models of handheld digital recorders, the “PAUSE” button
“RECORD” button acts as a pause. Be sure that you and the students understand how to
record, pause, stop, and erase using your school’s specific devices before moving on. If
students do not follow the correct recording process, their files may not record properly,
and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, press the “RECORD”
button and say, “My AP number is . . .,” speak your AP number in English,
and then press the “STOP” button. Go ahead and record your AP number
now. . . .
Play your test recording to check that you’ve recorded your AP number and
that your voice has recorded properly. Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please erase your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
stop the recording unless the equipment fails.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
136
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
From this point on, you will stop the recording only once, at the very end of
testing. Remember to press the “PAUSE” button between your recordings
when instructed to do so. Let’s record your AP number now. When you
have finished, press the “PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record
your AP number now. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
! needed
to match the student responses with the correct AP numbers. Confirm that each
student’s AP number label is on the bag holding the recorder he or she used.
IMPORTANT: Before dismissing the students, you must be sure to have the information
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet, handheld digital recorder, and CD. You may
keep your Student Pack only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are
collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. Check each CD
for the student’s AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to
have them put an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they
will not receive credit for their responses. You will require this information for saving
MP3 files.
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
Dismissing Students
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any
electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
137
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file. You
should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice has been
recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand
and I will help you. . . .
German Language and Culture
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with
anyone unless they are released on the College Board website in about two
days. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any
way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need
the information on this card to view your scores and order AP score
reporting services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School
Use Only” section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject score
roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the 2015-16
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain
seating charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be
retained for a longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their
exam shipments unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
! materials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. The
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed
unless the questions are released on the College Board website two days after
the exam.
END
Dismissing Students
138
AP Exam Instructions
START
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
SAVING AND NAMING MP3 FILES AND PREPARING
STUDENT-RESPONSE CDs FOR RETURN
When students have been dismissed, begin the process of saving the files for return to the
AP Program.
Saving and Naming Files: Digital Language Lab
Follow the lab manufacturer’s directions for collecting and saving each student’s file. Some
labs automatically name the files according to the student station number. If this is the case,
you must rename each file with the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s
orange booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You
may need to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Computer with MP3 Software
Saving and Naming Files: Handheld Digital Recorders
Follow your device manufacturer’s directions for connecting the device to a computer and
transferring each student’s file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name
should only have the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange
booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need
to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Burning Files to CDs: All Digital Recording Methods
For this exam, the folder to which you save the files should be named “2016 AP German
Language and Culture Exam, [Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the
front cover of the Section II free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner.
Do not save responses to individual questions as separate files. Save the entire student
response as a single file. Do not save any other student identification on the file.
After all students’ responses have been saved and renamed (if needed), copy each student’s
MP3 file onto his or her CD. Do not include more than one student’s responses on any CD.
Use one CD per student with all of that student’s responses in one file in order to facilitate
proper scoring. This also ensures that the responses are processed and scored in the same
manner as the tapes.
•• When burning each student’s MP3 file to the provided student-response CD, be sure to
select “Data Disc” or “Data CD” (not “Audio Disc” or “Audio CD”) in the preferences
of your CD-burning application.
•• Do not use applications such as Windows Media Player or iTunes versions that only
allow burning audio discs or CDs. This will help ensure that your students’ responses
can be accessed for scoring.
139
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Follow your software manufacturer’s directions for exporting and saving each student’s
file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name should only have the student’s
8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the
file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need to play the beginning of the
recording to check the AP number.
German Language and Culture
•
• If you recorded on computers using MP3 software, you must select to finalize or close
the CD after burning the file to the CD, using the same software you used to burn the
files. CDs that are not finalized or closed may NOT play on other computers. Please
refer to the software user guide to properly finalize the CD or close the CD, which will
instruct the software to complete the burning session on the CD.
Check each CD, making sure that the MP3 file has been burned to the CD and
that the file can be played. Failure to properly burn students’ MP3 files to CD
may result in a score delay or an exam part score of zero. It is imperative that you
ensure students’ MP3 files are properly burned to CD, with the burning sessions
completed, in accordance with your software requirements, and that the files be
present and audible on every CD you return for scoring.
Review each student’s orange booklet to identify any students who did not grant permission
to the College Board to reproduce the recorded material. Students who did not wish to
grant permission were instructed to write “NO” on the orange booklet. Using a permanent
marker, make a check mark on the CD next to “NO” for any students who did not grant
permission.
Make sure the student’s AP number label is on the CD. Place the CD in the case. Once the
students’ responses have been successfully copied to their CDs, delete their files from
the master console or server.
Do not save the content of the master CDs to your school’s computer network server or to a
computer’s hard drive.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Refer to page 138 for the tasks you need to
complete before storing materials.
END
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
140
AP Exam Instructions
Following is the list of tracks for the master listening CD, the master CD for the Persuasive Essay
task, and the master speaking CD. This list may be used in the following instances:
(1)If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD
for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2)The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved
by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in
returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master CD for Persuasive Essay Task: Tracks for the Persuasive Essay Task of AP German
Language and Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Task 2
Track 2:
Task 2
Track 3:
Directions: End of Part A
Master Speaking CD: Tracks for the Speaking Part of AP German Language and
Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part B
Track 2:
Directions: Task 3
Track 3:
Task 3
Track 4:
Task 3a
Track 5:
Task 3b
Track 6:
Task 3c
Track 7:
Task 3d
Track 8:
Task 3e
Track 9:
Directions: End of Task 3
Track 10:
Directions: Task 4
Track 11:
Task 4
Track 12:
Directions: End of Part B
141
GERMAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Listening Part of AP German Language and
Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part B
Track 2:
Selection 1
Tracks 3–12:
Questions 31–40
Track 13:
Selection 2
Tracks 14–20:
Questions 41–47
Track 21:
Selection 3
Tracks 22–26:
Questions 48–52
Track 27:
Selection 4
Tracks 28–32:
Questions 53–57
Track 33:
Selection 5
Tracks 34–41:
Questions 58–65
Track 42:
Directions: End of Part B
AP® Comparative Government and Politics Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 12, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 45 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 40 min.
Section I
Total Time: 45 minutes
Number of Questions: 55*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 40 minutes
Number of Questions: 8 required
questions
(5 short-answer concept questions,
1 conceptual analysis question,
2 country context questions)
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! Do
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 12, and you will be taking the AP Comparative
Government and Politics Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the AP Comparative
Government and Politics Exam.
142
AP Exam Instructions
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out
the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 45 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
143
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS: COMPARATIVE
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Government and Politics: Comparative
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during
the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email,
use a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication
device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiple-choice questions at
any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other students.
If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam score will
be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
144
AP Exam Instructions
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
exam booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 40 minutes to complete Section II. It is suggested
that you spend 30 minutes total on Questions 1 through 5, 30 minutes on
Question 6, and 20 minutes each on Questions 7 and 8. You are responsible
for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black
or dark blue ink. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand.
At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your
AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not write your
name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 30 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to Question 6 if you have not already done so.
After 30 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 7 if you have not already done so.
After 20 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 8 if you have not already done so.
After 10 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
145
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS: COMPARATIVE
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Government and Politics: Comparative
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
146
AP® United States Government and Politics Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday morning, May 10, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 45 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 40 min.
Section I
Total Time: 45 minutes
Number of Questions: 60*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 40 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 required
questions
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! Do
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday morning, May 10, and you will be taking the AP United States
Government and Politics Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the AP United States
Government and Politics Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
147
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS: UNITED STATES
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
Government and Politics: United States
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 45 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
148
AP Exam Instructions
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
149
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS: UNITED STATES
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
Government and Politics: United States
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 40 minutes to complete Section II. It is suggested
that you spend 25 minutes answering each question. At various points,
you will be advised to move on to the next question. You are responsible
for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black
or dark blue ink. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand.
At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your
AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not write your
name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 25 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to Question 2 if you have not already done so.
After 25 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 3 if you have not already done so.
After 25 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 4 if you have not already done so.
After 15 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
150
AP Exam Instructions
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
151
GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS: UNITED STATES
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box and
printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
AP® Human Geography Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday morning, May 13, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 15 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour
Number of Questions: 75*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 15 minutes
Number of Questions: 3 essays
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! Do
General Instructions for your group.
This exam includes survey questions. The time allowed for the survey questions is in addition to
the actual test-taking time.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday morning, May 13, and you will be taking the AP Human
Geography Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Human
Geography Exam.
152
AP Exam Instructions
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You have 1 hour for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 50 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
Stop working and turn to the AP Human Geography Survey Questions. You have
3 minutes to answer Questions 76–87. These are survey questions and will not
affect your score. You may not go back to work on any of the exam questions. . . .
153
HUMAN GEOGRAPHY
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Human Geography
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
Stop working and turn to the AP Human Geography Survey Questions. You have
3 minutes to answer Questions 76–87. These are survey questions and will not
affect your score. You may not go back to work on any of the exam questions. . . .
Give students approximately 3 minutes to answer the survey questions. Then say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
154
AP Exam Instructions
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams
this year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack
under your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 1 hour and 5 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
155
HUMAN GEOGRAPHY
You have 1 hour and 15 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible
for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black or
dark blue ink. You may use the unlined pages of this booklet to organize your
answers, but you must write your answers on the lined pages provided for
each question. Begin each answer on the lined page facing the question. If
you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each
extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your AP number and the
question number you are working on. Do not write your name. Are there
any questions? . . .
Human Geography
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your Exam AP score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
156
AP® Italian Language and Culture Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 11, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday morning, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 20 min.
Section I
Total Time: Approx. 1 hour
20 minutes
Number of Questions: 70*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 28 min.
Part A:
Listening
Time: approximately
25 minutes
Part B:
Reading
Time: 55 minutes
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks with written
responses
Tasks with spoken
responses
Time: approximately
70 minutes
Time: approximately
18 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hour
28 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
AP Student Packs
2015 -1 6 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
NEW: School-owned handheld digital recording devices that meet the acceptable criteria on
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital may be used for recording students’
responses for Part B of Section II of the AP Italian Language and Culture Exam.
Before exam day, the AP Coordinator should determine how best to administer the Italian
Language and Culture free-response section. The AP Coordinator should review the options
described in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual and choose the best option based on your
school’s resources and the number of students testing. The instructions that follow are based
on administering the exam in the standard sequence. The Email Reply task, Persuasive Essay
157
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each testing
room
• Master Persuasive Essay/Speaking
Double CD set for each testing room
• One CD player with external speakers
for each testing room
• Student-response tapes or CDs
• If recording student responses using a
tape recorder:
– Student response tapes, and
– Tape recorders with microphone
• If recording student responses digitally:
– Computers, work stations, or
handheld digital recording devices
in sealable quart-size plastic storage
bags
• Answer sheets
Italian Language and Culture
task, and Speaking part have been labeled to aid proctors using options other than the standard
sequence; you may find it helpful to note the sequence of the selected option in the margins of
these pages. Also, keep in mind the following:
• Section I must be administered first regardless of the sequence in which you administer the
parts of Section II.
• Make sure students do not open the sealed orange booklets until they are told to do so.
• Collect students’ exam materials before moving to other rooms and redistribute them in the
new room.
• Collect Student Packs only at the completion of all testing.
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed
on testing day. See “AP French, German, Italian, and Spanish Language and Culture Exams” in
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. We strongly encourage schools to
provide students with multiple opportunities throughout the year to practice making recordings
using the method that will be used on exam day.
You will need the master listening CD for Section I, Part A. You will also need the double CD set,
which contains the master CDs for the Persuasive Essay task and the Speaking part for Section II.
A list of tracks for all master audio CDs is available at the end of these instructions. A blank
student-response tape or CD is provided for each student taking the exam. It’s a good idea to have
extra blank tapes or CDs on hand.
If you plan to administer the speaking part of this exam:
• using a tape recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 163 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• in a digital language lab, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 166 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• using a computer with MP3 recording software, use the instructions for the speaking
part beginning on page 169 of this AP Exam Instructions book. You may also go to
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator for helpful information, including a link to free
MP3 recording software† that can be used for administering AP world language and culture
and Music Theory exams on a PC or Mac computer. We strongly recommend that your
school’s technical consultant be involved in determining if this software program is right for
your school.
• using a handheld digital recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning
on page 171 of this AP Exam Instructions book (new this year). You may go to
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital to review the criteria that
handheld digital recorders must meet to comply with AP Program policies.
This is not an AP Program or ETS endorsement of this product. If you experience any problems
during the installation or configuration of this software product only, technical assistance is
available between 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. ET, Monday through Friday. Your school staff can email
AP-MP3Recordertech@ets.org, or call 609-406-5677 for assistance during these hours.
†
IMPORTANT: For AP Exams, the only acceptable digital file format is MP3 when recording
using a digital lab, computer, or handheld digital recorder. It is very important that your
students practice recording MP3 files. Practice materials are available from the Exam
Information page on AP Central. Refer also to “Saving and Naming MP3 Files” on page 176
of this AP Exam Instructions book.
158
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! Do
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions.
See the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 91–92).
When you have completed the General Instructions, turn on the CD player and insert the master
listening CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to adjust the volume and then stop the CD.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 11, and you will be taking the AP Italian Language
and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday morning, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Italian Language and
Culture Exam.
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The instructions inside the exam booklets are in English and Italian.
Choose the language you are more comfortable with; do not spend time
reading both.
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open
your answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
159
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Italian Language and Culture
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For Italian
Language and Culture, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must
complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Section I takes approximately 1 hour and 20 minutes and is divided into two
parts. Part A consists of recorded selections with printed questions. You may
make notes in your exam booklet while you are listening to the recording.
I will not stop the recording at any time until the end of Part A. When the
recording for Part A stops, you may go on to Part B without waiting for
further instructions. Are there any questions? . . .
You will have approximately 25 minutes for Part A. Open your Section I
booklet to Part A and wait for the recording to begin. Raise your hand if you
do not hear the recording.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time for Part A here
. Note Stop
Time here
. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer
sheets. Approximately 25 minutes after beginning Part A, you will hear “End of recording.” At
that point, stop the CD player. Then say:
9
3
6
You may go on to Part B. You have 55 minutes for this part.
12
Note Start Time for Part B here
. Note Stop Time here
. Remove
the master listening CD from the CD player. Check that students are marking their answers in
pencil on their answer sheets. After 45 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Read Item Q on your answer
sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles and look up when you have finished. . . .
Give students 1 minute to complete Item Q. Then say:
Put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make sure your AP number
label and AP Exam label are on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while
I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that an AP number label and an AP Exam
label have been applied to page 1. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
160
AP Exam Instructions
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will
be using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place
your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but don’t
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
orange booklet aside; you will need it for Part B. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II exam
booklet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
161
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
SECTION II: Free Response
Italian Language and Culture
Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. Read the information on
the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the exam booklet or
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You may use any blank space to organize your thoughts and for scratch
work, but you must write your responses on the lined pages in the exam
booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra piece of paper
you use, be sure to write only your AP number and the number of the task
you are working on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
START
Task 1: Email Reply
Say:
You have 15 minutes to complete Task 1, the Email Reply task.
You may work only on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated
by the number 1 across the top of each page. You may review your
response if you finish before the end of Task 1 is announced but you may
not go on to Task 2. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your exam booklet to Part A, Task 1, and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students
are using pens and that they are working only on the pages that correspond to Task 1. After
15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
Stop working.
END
Task 1: Email Reply
START
Task
2: and
Persuasive
Essay
Turn on the CD
player
insert the master
CD for Task 2, the Persuasive Essay task.
Play the first sentence of Track 1 of the CD so that you can adjust the volume, and then
stop the CD. Then say:
You have approximately 55 minutes to complete Task 2, the Persuasive
Essay task.
Turn to Part A, Task 2, in your exam booklet. You will be working now
on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated by the number 2
across the top of each page.
Please wait for the recording to begin. I will not stop the CD until the end.
If you finish your work on Task 2 before time is called, you may check your
responses for both Task 1 and Task 2.
162
AP Exam Instructions
Are there any questions? . . .
12
Raise your hand if you do not hear the recording.
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time
6
here
. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning the task, you will hear “End of
recording.” At that point, stop the CD player. Then say:
9
3
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Put your Section II exam
booklet on your desk, face up. Keep the sealed orange booklet; you will
need it for Part B, Speaking.
END
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from every student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
START
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
Use the following instructions if students are recording their responses on a blank
student-response tape.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
163
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Italian Language and Culture
TA PE
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON TAPE
When you are ready, say:
I’m going to give each of you a tape for recording your responses.
Give each student a blank student-response tape. Then say:
Remove the shrinkwrap and take the tape out of its case. . . .
An AP number label has to be put on your tape. Get your Student Pack
from under your chair and take out an AP number label. . . .
Without covering the tape spool, put the label on the front in the space
indicated. Your tape will not be scored if your AP number is not on
the tape. . . .
Unless you check the “No” box on the tape, you give permission to the
College Board to use your recorded responses for educational research and
instructional purposes. Now put the tape in your tape recorder, with Side 1
facing out. . . .
When all tapes are in position, say:
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so.
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. . . .
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on your
desk except a pen, tape recorder and orange booklet. . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
I am now going to ask you to record your AP number, and we’ll test to
make sure everything is working. Check that your tape is on Side 1. Use
the fast forward button to advance the tape beyond the colored leader
portion. When I tell you to, start recording and say, “My AP number is . . .”
and record your AP number in English. Then stop your tape recorder.
Go ahead and record. . . .
Now rewind your tape and play back what you recorded. After you have
heard your voice clearly saying your complete AP number, stop your
tape recorder. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may
make it appear that you did not record or complete your response and
could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
164
AP Exam Instructions
TA PE
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording or if you have trouble
with your equipment, raise your hand. I will not replay the recording if you
don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the recording unless the
equipment fails. You must not stop or pause your tape unless the recording
tells you to do so. You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t
open it until I tell you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the CD player. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Check that students are operating the equipment properly and that students are not pausing
and stopping their recorders unless they are instructed to do so by the voice on the recording.
When all students have rewound their tapes and removed them from the tape
recorders, say:
If you recorded on Side 2 of the tape, check the box on the tape label
that reads “Check here if Side 2.”. . .
You may now put the tape in its case. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and tape. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each tape for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their tape before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. If a student recorded on Side 2 of the tape, complete an Incident
Report Form. On the Incident Report Form select “Other” as the type of incident, and
complete the “Incident Detail–Explanation” area. Now go to page 175 to continue with
instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
165
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their tapes to
be sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hand if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material. When you hear the words
“End of recording,” stop the master CD.
Italian Language and Culture
START
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Italian Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until they are copied later to individual CDs.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses in a digital language
lab. The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses
when recording using a digital language lab. At various points, there will be two sets of
instructions: one if students can control their own recordings, and one if you or another
proctor controls student recordings from a master console. Follow the instructions accordingly.
Before students enter the digital language lab, set up the room following your lab
manufacturer’s instructions. Isolate the student stations as necessary to ensure that
students are directed only to the stations being used. From the console, make sure that all
student stations are on and the correct recording and save file format are activated.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
DIGITAL
LAB
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES IN A
DIGITAL LANGUAGE LAB
Once the students enter the room, direct them to the appropriate stations. Instruct students
to put on their headsets and adjust their microphones. When you are ready to begin, say:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a
pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an
AP number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD
case. Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information
on the front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the
orange booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
166
AP Exam Instructions
DIGITAL
LAB
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record
your AP number. Also, write the number of the station at which you are
sitting so your files can be saved accurately. Now write your name under
the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes. Are there
any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, and
your CD. . . .
Read the following if students can control their recordings:
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice
has recorded properly. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
Read the following if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a
master console:
Your recordings will be started, paused, and stopped from this console.
You will not need to do anything when you hear these instructions. You
should record your responses at a normal speaking level.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English.
167
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your
responses at a normal speaking level.
Italian Language and Culture
DIGITAL
LAB
Start the student recordings and say:
Go ahead and say your AP number. . . .
Once all students have spoken their AP numbers, pause the recordings and say:
Sit quietly while I check that you’ve recorded your AP numbers, and
that your voices have recorded properly.
Check that students’ AP numbers have recorded properly.
Continue for all administrations:
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I
will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will
not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes
in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you to do so. Are there
any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break
the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from
the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their recordings to
be sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material.
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive credit
for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files. Now go to
page 175 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
168
AP Exam Instructions
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Italian Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until you copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a computer,
using MP3 recording software. Be aware of the requirements for recording student
responses using a computer:
1. S chool-owned laptops may be used only if they remain in the school at all times and are
not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned laptops may not be used
under any circumstances.
2. Th
e MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses when
recording using a computer. Check your software well before the exam administration to
be sure it is capable of recording and saving in MP3 format. If not, please use the software
program described on www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
4.Each student’s recorded file must begin with his or her AP number. If you use the
student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to record
it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
5. Your exam shipment will contain a student response CD for each student.
Before students enter the room, make sure all computers are on and that the correct
recording and save file format are activated.
COMPUTER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON A COMPUTER
WITH MP3 SOFTWARE
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a
pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an
AP number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD
case. Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information
on the front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the
orange booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
169
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
3.Each student’s responses must be recorded as one MP3 file. Therefore, for most software
packages, the “STOP” button should not be pressed until the speaking part is finished.
Pressing “STOP” before recording is finished may create two files and overwrite
earlier work.
Italian Language and Culture
COMPUTER
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your
recorded responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange
booklet, and your CD. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your
responses at a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. Now put on your headset or move the
microphone to the best position to achieve a good recording level.
When I tell you to, say, “My AP number is . . .” and record your AP
number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your
voice has recorded properly. Click the “PLAY” button to replay
this test recording. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please delete your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I
will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will
not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. Remember to use the
“PAUSE” button when you are instructed to do so.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell
you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break
the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from
the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
170
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
MPORTANT: If your MP3 recording software requires students to deselect
! Ithe
“PAUSE” button before they can continue their recording, you must remind
them to do so. If they do not follow the correct recording process for your software,
their files may not record properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say: If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file.
You should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice
has been recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise
your hand and I will help you. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES USING A
HANDHELD DIGITAL RECORDER
Be aware of the requirements for recording student responses using a handheld digital
recorder:
1.School-owned handheld digital recorders may be used if they remain in the school at
all times and are not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned devices
may not be used under any circumstances.
2.If the device includes features for wireless communication over a network — including
cellular, Bluetooth®, or WiFi — the communication capability MUST be disabled.
3.If the device includes features for taking pictures or video such as a built-in camera or
webcam, the camera or webcam MUST be disabled.
4.
The device MUST be capable of saving the recorded audio as an MP3 formatted
digital file. No other audio file format (e.g., WAV, WMA, or AAC) is acceptable.
5.The device MUST have the ability to record (begin the recording), stop (stop/end the
recording), and pause/unpause (temporarily suspend the recording and then continue
recording). The stop (or a separate save) control should create a digital file that
contains the recording.
171
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files.
Italian Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
6.The device MUST include a means to move or copy digital files from the device to an
external computer. Most devices do so via a USB port and cable or removable media
(SD card); either is acceptable.
7.Each student’s recorded response must begin with his or her AP number. If you use
the student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to
record it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Italian Language Exam, [Form __].” The
form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II free-response booklet
in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder until you
copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Consider the following suggestion for keeping track of student responses (this is a best
practice, not a requirement):
Figure 1
Before students enter the room, place each
handheld digital recorder in its own sealable
quart-size plastic storage bag. Have students
place their AP number label on the bag in the
order in which they record, if applicable (so that
the second student places his or her AP number
label below the first student’s AP number label
and so on) and write their sequence number in
the far left margin of the label. (See Figure 1.)
After a student finishes using a device, lock that
student’s response file if the device permits you
to do so. When the exam is over, put the device
back into the bag. The person responsible for
transferring the student responses from the
device to a computer and then saving the files
will have the students’ AP numbers.
Instructions:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will be
transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a handheld digital recorder, a
sealed orange booklet, a pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case. Now
close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the front
cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet
until you are told to do so. . . .
172
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet, your
CD, and a handheld digital recorder. . . .
MPORTANT: In some models of handheld digital recorders, the “PAUSE” button
! Iisbutton.
combined with the “PLAY” button. In others, it is combined with the “RECORD”
If you don’t see any buttons labeled “PAUSE,” it is very possible that the
“RECORD” button acts as a pause. Be sure that you and the students understand how to
record, pause, stop, and erase using your school’s specific devices before moving on. If
students do not follow the correct recording process, their files may not record properly,
and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, press the “RECORD”
button and say, “My AP number is . . .,” speak your AP number in English,
and then press the “STOP” button. Go ahead and record your AP number
now. . . .
Play your test recording to check that you’ve recorded your AP number and
that your voice has recorded properly. Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please erase your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
stop the recording unless the equipment fails.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
173
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses. You
should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to do
so by the voice on the recording. You should record your responses at a
normal speaking level. Does everyone know how to use the controls and
buttons on the device to record, pause, stop, and erase? If not, please raise
your hand. . . .
Italian Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
From this point on, you will stop the recording only once, at the very end of
testing. Remember to press the “PAUSE” button between your recordings
when instructed to do so. Let’s record your AP number now. When you
have finished, press the “PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record
your AP number now. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file. You
should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice has been
recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand
and I will help you. . . .
! needed
to match the student responses with the correct AP numbers. Confirm that each
student’s AP number label is on the bag holding the recorder he or she used.
IMPORTANT: Before dismissing the students, you must be sure to have the information
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet, handheld digital recorder, and CD. You may
keep your Student Pack only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are
collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. Check each CD
for the student’s AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to
have them put an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they
will not receive credit for their responses. You will require this information for saving
MP3 files.
END
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
174
AP Exam Instructions
START
Dismissing Students
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any
electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with
anyone unless they are released on the College Board website in about two
days. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any
way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the
“School Use Only” section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject score
roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the 2015-16
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain
seating charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be
retained for a longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their
exam shipments unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
MPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
! Imaterials.
This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. The
free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed
unless the questions are released on the College Board website two days after
the exam.
END
Dismissing Students
175
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
You are now dismissed.
Italian Language and Culture
START
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
SAVING AND NAMING MP3 FILES AND PREPARING
STUDENT-RESPONSE CDs FOR RETURN
When students have been dismissed, begin the process of saving the files for return to the
AP Program.
Saving and Naming Files: Digital Language Lab
Follow the lab manufacturer’s directions for collecting and saving each student’s file. Some
labs automatically name the files according to the student station number. If this is the case,
you must rename each file with the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s
orange booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You
may need to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Computer with MP3 Software
Follow your software manufacturer’s directions for exporting and saving each student’s
file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name should only have the student’s
8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the
file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need to play the beginning of the
recording to check the AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Handheld Digital Recorder
Follow your device manufacturer’s directions for connecting the device to a computer and
transferring each student’s file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name
should only have the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange
booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need
to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Burning Files to CDs: All Digital Recording Methods
For this exam, the folder to which you save the files should be named “2016 AP Italian
Language and Culture Exam, [Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the
front cover of the Section II free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner.
Do not save responses to individual questions as separate files. Save the entire student
response as a single file. Do not save any other student identification on the file.
After all students’ responses have been saved and renamed (if needed), copy each student’s
MP3 file onto his or her CD. Do not include more than one student’s responses on any CD.
Use one CD per student with all of that student’s responses in one file in order to facilitate
proper scoring. This also ensures that the responses are processed and scored in the same
manner as the tapes.
•• When burning each student’s MP3 file to the provided student-response CD, be
sure to select “Data Disc” or “Data CD” (not “Audio Disc” or “Audio CD”) in the
preferences of your CD-burning application.
•• Do not use applications such as Windows Media Player or iTunes versions that only
allow burning audio discs or CDs. This will help ensure that your students’ responses
can be accessed for scoring.
176
AP Exam Instructions
•• If you recorded on computers using MP3 software, you must select to finalize or
close the CD after burning the file to the CD, using the same software you used
to burn the files. CDs that are not finalized or closed may NOT play on other
computers. Please refer to the software user guide to properly finalize the CD or
close the CD, which will instruct the software to complete the burning session on
the CD.
Check each CD, making sure that the MP3 file has been burned to the CD and
that the file can be played. Failure to properly burn students’ MP3 files to CD
may result in a score delay or an exam part score of zero. It is imperative that you
ensure students’ MP3 files are properly burned to CD, with the burning sessions
completed, in accordance with your software requirements, and that the files be
present and audible on every CD you return for scoring.
Review each student’s orange booklet to identify any students who did not grant permission
to the College Board to reproduce the recorded material. Students who did not wish to
grant permission were instructed to write “NO” on the orange booklet. Using a permanent
marker, make a check mark on the CD next to “NO” for any students who did not grant
permission.
Do not save the content of the master CDs to your school’s computer network server or to a
computer’s hard drive.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Refer to page 175 for the tasks you need to
complete before storing materials.
END
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
177
ITALIAN LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Make sure the student’s AP number label is on the CD. Place the CD in the case. Once the
students’ responses have been successfully copied to their CDs, delete their files from
the master console or server.
Italian Language and Culture
Following is the list of tracks for the master listening CD, the master CD for the Persuasive Essay
task, and the master speaking CD. This list may be used in the following instances:
(1)If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD
for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2)The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved
by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in
returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Listening Part of AP Italian Language and Culture Exam
Track 1: Directions: Listening Part
Track 2: Selection 1
Track 3: Selection 2
Track 4: Selection 3
Track 5: Selection 4
Track 6: Selection 5
Track 7: Selection 6
Track 8: Selection 7
Track 9: Directions: End of Listening Part
Master CD for Persuasive Essay Task: Tracks for the Persuasive Essay Task of AP Italian
Language and Culture Exam
Track 1: Directions: Task 2
Track 2: Task 2
Track 3: Directions: End of Part A
Master Speaking CD: Tracks for the Speaking Part of AP Italian Language and Culture Exam
Track 1: Directions: Part B
Track 2: Directions: Task 3
Track 3: Task 3
Track 4: Task 3a
Track 5: Task 3b
Track 6: Task 3c
Track 7: Task 3d
Track 8: Task 3e
Track 9: Directions: End of Task 3
Track 10: Directions: Task 4
Track 11: Task 4
Track 12: Directions: End of Part B
178
AP® Japanese Language and Culture Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 4, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday morning, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 20 min. Section II Total Time: 40 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 20 minutes
Number of Questions: 70*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Part A:
Listening
Time: 20 minutes
Part B:
Reading
Time: 60 minutes
Part A:
Writing
Time: 30 minutes
Part B:
Speaking
Time: 10 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 40 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic devices
(if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
•Watch
• Colored scratch paper
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
–“Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
• Fee Reduction/Section Designation
Form
These instructions combine the General Instructions with the exam-specific instructions for
AP Japanese Language and Culture. Students who have already completed the purple areas on a
registration answer sheet for 2016, either at a preadministration session or at their first exam will
not need to complete certain information. When you have a group that includes students who
have filled out these areas on the answer sheet and some who have not, you will be instructing
those who have already filled out their registration information to sit quietly and not to complete
certain fields. All students should be following your instructions and continue navigating
through the screens as a group to access the confirmation screen and the exam.
Note: Any information entered during a practice session using the Setup CD is not saved and
does not constitute a preadministration session.
Please note that uniform procedures are essential to a standardized testing program. The only
way to ensure comparable scores is if exam proctors follow the same procedures and give
instructions exactly as they appear in this book. By strictly following these procedures, you give
students the best chance of fair testing.
179
JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
• AP Student Packs
• AP Japanese Language and Culture
Exam CDs
• 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
• Exam passwords and codes (see page 107
in the AP Coordinator’s Manual)
• This book — AP Exam Instructions
• AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
•AP SSD Guidelines booklet
• School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
Japanese Language and Culture
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with the following procedures,
found in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual:
•• Resuming or terminating an interrupted exam — pages 113–115
•• Troubleshooting tips — pages 118–121
•• Post-exam activities — pages 116–117
Notes:
•• Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are not supported for
2016. The Apple Mac and iMac computer systems are not supported for 2016. Complete
hardware/software and technical configuration requirements are available on pages 104
and 105 of the 2015-16 Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Microsoft® Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Enterprise, and Windows
10 Education are supported operating systems for the 2016 administration of the AP
Japanese Exam.
School Code and Home-School/Self-Study Codes
Post your six-digit school code and your school name prominently. If you don’t know your
school’s code, please get this information from your AP Coordinator. If you are testing
students who attend other schools and you know their school codes, post the numbers. For
U.S. schools, the code for home-schooled students for students in your state is on page 19 of the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual. Home-school/self-study codes for other countries are also
listed on page 19 of the AP Coordinator’s Manual.
Exam Materials
Be sure you have the correct exam CDs and AP Student Packs. As students enter the testing
room, the proctor should hand three sheets of photocopied colored scratch paper (use the
template on page 125 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual) and a pencil to each student.
Reading Instructions
Read aloud all the instructions in bold. When ellipses (. . .) appear in the text, pause to allow
time for students to follow the instructions. All other instructions are for you and should not be
read aloud. Spend as much time as necessary instructing students how to enter the information
properly on the computer screens. Read the instructions verbatim at a moderate pace. This
allows students to hear the complete instructions, preventing errors that could result in delays
in score reporting. You should answer all questions about procedure, but do not answer any
questions about exam content.
You should assign students to the workstations. (Computers for any students with disabilities
approved for screen magnification should have been identified prior to the administration. These
computers should have had the screen magnification software installed.) Make sure everyone is
seated and that you have everyone’s attention.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 4, and you will be taking the AP Japanese
Language and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday morning, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Japanese Language
and Culture Exam.
180
AP Exam Instructions
Please listen very carefully to all of my instructions. You will all begin testing
at the same time, and you will all be dismissed at the same time for the break
as well as at the end of the exam. Please do not touch the keyboard until
I tell you to do so. Testing will begin after you complete the identification
information on your computer screen. The College Board is obligated to
report scores that accurately reflect your performance. Therefore, exam
administration and security procedures are in place to ensure that all of you
have an equal opportunity to demonstrate your abilities and that no one has
an unfair advantage. Please listen carefully to the following instructions.
If you have any of these devices, bring them to me now. Make sure each
device is turned off. You may pick them up when you are dismissed. Are
there any questions? . . .
You should be prepared to hold students’ electronic devices until the end of testing. You may
provide containers, such as paper lunch bags or plastic bags that can be marked with the
student’s name, to facilitate return of their devices.
You should have nothing at your workstation except a pencil and three
sheets of colored scratch paper. Take a moment and write your name and AP
number on the scratch paper. . . .
The scratch paper will be collected at the end of the exam. If you need
additional scratch paper, raise your hand. I will collect your used scratch
paper before I can give you more. You may not eat or drink in this room.
Raise your hand if you must go to the restroom during the exam or if you
need to leave the room for any emergency. You may not leave the room at
the end of testing until you have been dismissed.
Do not share or exchange materials with anyone. Furthermore, you should
not — nor should you attempt to — change, add, or utilize any options,
settings, and/or programs within your workstation that are not authorized
as part of the AP Exam delivery system. If you use an unauthorized aid,
such as a dictionary, fail to follow exam procedures, or create a disturbance,
you may be dismissed and your score may be canceled.
The College Board reserves the right to question any exam score that may
be the result of cheating. If you become aware of any possible cheating on
this exam, contact the Office of Testing Integrity. The phone number and
email address are in your Student Pack. Are there any questions? . . .
181
JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
You must now close all bags and place them on the floor under your
chair; you are not permitted to access them, including during the break,
until you are dismissed at the end of the exam. The following devices
are prohibited: cell phones, smartphones, smartwatches, laptops, tablet
computers, portable listening or recording devices such as MP3 players and
iPods, cameras or other photographic equipment, devices that can access
the Internet, and any other electronic or communication devices. If you are
observed with any of these devices at any time during testing or breaks,
the device will be confiscated, you will be dismissed, and your score may
be canceled.
Japanese Language and Culture
I will now return Student Packs to those of you who have already completed
the identification information. Please make sure you have been given your
correct materials. . . .
Return Student Packs to students who have attended a preadministration session or have already
taken an AP Exam.
I will now distribute Student Packs to the rest of you.
STUDENT PACK AND UNIQUE AP NUMBER
Distribute one AP Student Pack to each of the remaining students. You may skip the
following instructions for completing the AP Student Pack and AP number card, if all
students have already done this. When everyone has a Student Pack, say:
Is there anyone who does not have a Student Pack? . . .
Provide a Student Pack, if necessary.
If you have already completed the identification information, please sit
quietly. You will still be required to navigate through the screens and
complete certain information.
Those of you who are completing the identification information for the
first time, follow the directions as I read them. This will help ensure that
your scores are provided correctly to you, your school, and the college
of your choice. Information you provide may be used for educational
research purposes.
Each year that you take AP Exams, you are assigned a new AP number.
Your 2016 AP number is located on a sheet of labels in the center of your
Student Pack. You must use these same labels on all AP Exams you take in
2016. If you run out of number labels, you must write your AP number in the
areas indicated. You may not receive a new AP Student Pack or share labels
with anyone. Turn to the sheet of AP number labels in the center of your
Student Pack. . . .
Now, in the upper right-hand corner of the sheet of number labels, write
your name in the space provided. . . .
When you have finished, pull off one label and turn to the back cover of
the Student Pack. Place the label in the top left-hand corner of the College
Information Card, where indicated. . . .
Your scores will be available online in July. Turn to the inside front cover of
your Student Pack and review the steps you’ll need to take to access your
scores online. . . .
Now turn to the back cover of your Student Pack and see the AP number
card at the bottom of the inside flap. Take an AP number label and place it
on the card in the area indicated, write your name on the card and remove
the card from the booklet. Place the card on the floor under your chair for
now. After you have been dismissed, put the card in your wallet, and keep
it for future reference. Do NOT share your AP number with anyone else.
182
AP Exam Instructions
You will need the information on this card to view your scores and order AP
score reporting services online in July. . . .
Now turn to the front cover of your Student Pack. Print your grade level, last
name, first name and middle initial in the spaces indicated. . . .
Now print the six-digit school code for the school you attend. The school
code for [say your school’s name] is __ __ __ __ __ __. If you do not attend [say
your school’s name], enter the code for your school. If you are home-schooled,
the code you should use is posted. If you do not know your school’s code,
raise your hand. . . .
Students will be required to enter their school code in the Student Information registration
screens. Call AP Services if you are unable to determine the school code for any student.
Print your AP number in the spaces provided. Now fill in the box next to
each AP Exam you plan to take this year.
I will now distribute an exam CD to each of you.
Distribute one exam CD to each student.
Please remove the shrinkwrap and take the CD out of the case. Take an AP
number label and place it on the CD. . . .
Now insert the CD in the CD drive of your computer. . . .
A small window with a dark blue background will appear. This may take a
few moments. Some messages will appear.
Next, a full screen with a lighter blue background will appear with a
message indicating that the IME configuration is in progress. Some
configuration messages will automatically appear and disappear. Don’t
touch the keyboard or click the mouse until I tell you. Look up when you
see the screen titled “Student Information Part 1.”. . .
If you see anything on the screen that isn’t what I have just described,
please raise your hand for assistance. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
May I have everyone’s attention? As you navigate through the Student
Information registration screens, note that you may use the Next and
Previous buttons or use the scroll bar on the right, as necessary.
Put your Student Pack aside. Before we begin with the first Student
Information registration screen, I’d like to point out that it is very important
that you provide the same identification information from year to year and
exam to exam. If you provide different information from year to year you
could have an incomplete score report.
183
JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
If you want to send comments or suggestions to the AP Program, or if you
believe there is a problem with an exam question, contact the AP Program
directly. Contact information and instructions can be found on page 3 of
your Student Pack.
Japanese Language and Culture
Let’s begin. The title under the shaded box should read Student Information
Part 1. Everyone must enter the following information. Please enter your AP
number, last name, first name, and middle initial. Note that you can enter no
more than 15 alphabetic characters for your last name. . . .
For students who have been approved by the College Board SSD Office to receive testing
accommodations, you should go to the student’s computer and check the box: Check here if you
require testing accommodations. You will then need to enter the administrator password to
access the screen titled “Computer Delivered Testing Accommodations.” This screen includes
options for the following testing accommodations: additional breaks, adjustable colors, extended
time, and screen magnification. Check the boxes that apply and use the drop-down menus to
choose the approved amount of time for breaks and extended time for this student. (See pages
15–17 of the AP SSD Guidelines booklet for step-by-step instructions.)
Are there any questions? . . .
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the next screen titled Student
Information Part 2. . . .
The Online Provider Code field should be completed by anyone who has
prepared for this exam by taking an online course or exam review. Use the
drop-down menu to select your provider. Doing this allows the College
Board to share your exam score with the online provider. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Read and complete the questions regarding language. . . .
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the next screen titled Student
Information Part 3. Before we continue, I’d like to point out that this
information needs to be completed only once this year no matter how
many AP Exams you take. If you have completed a registration AP answer
sheet this year, check the box at the top of the screen, then wait quietly
until I tell you to click “Next.” Are there any questions? . . .
Those of you who must complete this information, enter your date of birth
in the order day/month/year. . . .
Please enter your Social Security number. If you are not sure of your Social
Security number, don’t guess. This item is optional. However, if you have
previously taken an AP Exam and you supplied this information, you should
do so again. . . .
Complete the information for Sex and Racial/Ethnic Group. For Racial/Ethnic
Group, there are two questions. If you identify with multiple races and
ethnic groups, you may mark all choices that apply to you. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
For the next two questions on this screen, indicate the highest level of
education completed by your parents or guardians by selecting from the
drop-down menus. . . .
Now answer the last question about language. Do not go on to the next
screen until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
184
AP Exam Instructions
Are there any questions? . . .
May I have everyone’s attention? All of you may now click “Next” to go to
the screen titled Home Address and Phone. If you have already completed
it for this year, please sit quietly and wait for the rest of the group to finish.
Enter your complete mailing address, including the ZIP or postal code. . . .
Now enter your phone number, including your area code. Do not
go on to the next screen until you are told to do so. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
Now please provide your email address so the College Board can send
you important information about your scores. If you mark “Yes” when
we get to Student Search Service®, this email address will be provided
to colleges, universities, scholarship programs and educational
opportunity organizations. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Now, if you have a student identifier or student ID number issued by your
state, district or school, enter that number here. You may enter up to
25 characters. Use only numbers and letters. You will be able to use
your student ID number to access your AP Exam scores online in July. . . .
From the drop-down menu, select your current grade level. . . .
Now you will need the code number of the college you want to receive your
AP Exam score report. The list of college codes is in your Student Pack,
starting on page 10. You must fill in this item, or your score report will not
be sent. If there is no code listed for your college, enter 0000 (four zeroes),
then complete the College Information Card on the back cover of your
Student Pack and submit it to AP Services to avoid the score reporting fee. If
you don’t have a college you’d like to send your score report to, you should
also enter 0000. However, if you wish to send your scores to a college later,
you will have to pay a fee. . . .
The last item asks if you wish to participate in the College Board’s Student
Search Service®, a free service that provides names of students to certified
educational organizations. Selecting “Yes” lets colleges, universities,
scholarship programs, and educational opportunity organizations know
that you are interested in receiving information about the educational and
financial aid opportunities they offer. The institutions that request it will
receive your name, address, and some other information that you’ve already
provided. They will not receive your actual exam scores or your telephone
number. If you don’t answer this question, and you previously chose to
participate in this service, the College Board will continue to provide your
information. Do not go on to the next screen until you are told to do so.
185
JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
All of you may now click “Next” to go to the screen titled School and
College Information. In the first field, remember to enter the code of the
school that you attend. . . .
Japanese Language and Culture
Look up when you have finished. . . .
When everyone has looked up, say:
Now click “Next.” This screen is confirmation of all the information you
have entered so far. Review the information carefully. You will not be able
to make changes after continuing. If you need to make changes, click
“Previous” and return to the screens that require revision. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
May I have everyone’s attention? You may now click “Continue” to go
to the survey questions, which everyone must complete. Everyone turn
to page 2 of your Student Pack. Read the survey questions, then click
on the appropriate buttons on the screen to answer these questions.
You will be asked to complete these questions before every exam you
take, and they will not affect your score. Do not click “Continue” until
you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The identification information for your exam is now complete. Close
your Student Pack and put it under your chair for now. Do not touch the
computer until you are told to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Answer all questions and then begin the instructions for the exam. Make sure you begin the
exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating chart for this exam. See
pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 112). Then say:
Now click “Continue” and proceed to the screen titled “Begin Exam.” Wait
there until I tell you to go on.
The AP Japanese Language and Culture Exam is completely computerbased. However, if you need assistance at any time during the exam, raise
your hand. At various points throughout the exam, you will be asked to
check your headsets and microphone volume levels and to perform various
tasks. Follow the instructions carefully.
This exam consists of a multiple-choice section and a free-response section.
When you reach the General Directions screen, read it completely. The
timer on the computer will let you know how much time you have for each
question or part. Please note that the directions throughout the exam
regarding timing for specific questions reflect the standard timing. The timer
is in the upper right-hand corner of the screen. If you have been approved
for extended time, the adjusted timing for applicable parts of the exam will
be reflected accurately on the timer. The exam will not stop until it is time
to have a break.
While you are working on the exam, you may make notes on the colored
scratch paper. You may not use your own scratch paper, and you may not
remove any portion of the scratch paper from the testing room at any time.
186
AP Exam Instructions
Are there any questions? . . .
After the two parts in the multiple-choice section, Listening and Reading,
you will have a 10-minute break. You will not all reach the break screen
at the same time. When you reach the break screen, read the message
carefully. The screen will read “Your break will begin when the proctor
dismisses the entire group. . . .” The timer will count down the time, but this
will not affect your break or completing the next section of the exam. Do
not leave your workstation. You will all begin the break at the same time,
and return from break at the same time. Sit quietly at your workstation until
I give instructions to dismiss the entire group. Are there any questions? . . .
Ensure that all students click “Begin Exam” and that they have launched their exams. You
should circulate around the testing room to ensure that students have launched their exams
and that they are following the directions on the screens. As students complete the second part
(Reading) and reach the break screen, make sure that they are sitting quietly, not touching their
keyboards, and not disturbing the other students still testing. When all students have reached
the break screen, say:
Has everyone reached the break screen? . . .
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or
textbooks. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email,
use a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication
device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiple-choice questions
at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other
students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam
score will be canceled. When you return from break, you must return to your
assigned workstation. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? . . .
You should see the “End of Break” screen on your computer. Please
confirm that your name appears on the screen, then click on “Information
is Correct.” You will be at the screen titled “Resuming Exam.” Do not touch
your keyboard until I tell you. I have more instructions to give you. In a
moment, you will begin working on the free-response section of the exam
187
JAPANESE LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
From now until you reach the break screen, you should follow the directions
on your computer. Throughout the exam, some screens will require that you
click on the “Continue” button at the top right of the screen. Other screens
will appear for an amount of time that should be long enough for you to
read the directions completely, and then the exam will go on automatically.
For your reference, important directions will be repeated on subsequent
screens or you will be able to access them by clicking on the Help button.
You may now click “Begin Exam” on the screen, and launch your exam. . . .
Japanese Language and Culture
which includes Writing and Speaking. You will not all finish the exam at
the same time. Again, at various points, you will be asked to check your
headsets and microphone volume levels, and to perform various tasks.
Follow the instructions carefully. Are there any questions? . . .
After you complete the free-response section of the exam, there will be a
screen that asks you to grant the College Board the right to use your exam
responses. You must answer “Yes” or “No.” When you have completed
that screen, the exam is finished. It is critical that you do not touch the
keyboard or anything on the computer after you have completed this task.
The computer will be processing your exam responses. Sit quietly at your
workstation until I give you further instructions. You may not leave the
testing room. Are there any questions? . . .
You may now click “Next” and resume testing. . . .
Once all students have resumed testing, you should continue to circulate to ensure exam
security. When all students have completed testing, say:
I will now collect your scratch paper. Remain in your seat, without talking,
while this material is collected. Do not touch the keyboard or you may lose
all of your responses.
Ensure that you have received three sheets of scratch paper from each student. When all
materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic devices
you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
After students are dismissed, follow the procedures for returning exam results. See
“Post-Exam Activities” on pages 116–117 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual, and
page 124 of the AP Coordinator’s Manual regarding the Fee Reduction/Section Designation
form. Exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the
AP Program after your school’s last administration.
188
AP® Latin
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 13, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. Section II Total Time: 2 hr.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour
Number of Questions: 50*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
Total Time: 2 hours
Number of Questions: 5 questions
(15-minute reading period, 1 hour 45-minute
writing period)
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
! General Instructions for your group.
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 13, and you will be taking the AP Latin Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Latin Exam.
189
LATIN
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Latin
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open
your answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For Latin,
you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must complete the answer
sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning on
page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per question. Completely fill
in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and completely. No
credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet. Scratch
paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 50 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
190
AP Exam Instructions
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
191
LATIN
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Latin
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
The total Section II time is 2 hours. This includes a 15-minute reading
period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to develop
thoughtful, well-organized responses. You are advised to take advantage of
the reading period to plan what you will write. You may begin writing your
exam responses before the reading period is over. You may make notes on
the pages that contain the exam questions, but your responses must be
written on the designated lined pages using a pen with black or dark blue
ink. Are there any questions? . . .
You are responsible for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one
question to the next. The questions are printed on the left-hand pages. Write
your answers on the lined right-hand pages next to the questions. Do not
write any part of your answers on the pages containing the questions.
You may need more than one page to answer Questions 3, 4, and 5. Each of
those questions is therefore repeated on consecutive left-hand pages so that
you can continue to see the question after you flip to the next page(s) of your
answer. Make sure to begin your response on the lined page next to the first
appearance of the question.
Be sure that you answer all five of the questions. If you need more paper to
complete your responses, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of
paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number, and
• the question number you are working on.
You may now open the Section II booklet and begin the 15-minute
reading period.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
The reading period is over. You have 1 hour and 45 minutes remaining to
complete Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens with black or dark blue ink to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 1 hour
and 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
192
AP Exam Instructions
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
193
LATIN
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015 - 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Music Theory
AP® Music Theory Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday morning, May 9, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 20 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 20 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 20 minutes
Number of Questions: 75*
Percent of Total Score: 45%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Part A:
Part B:
With recorded music
Without recorded music
Time: approximately
45 minutes
Time: 35 minutes
Part A:
Number of Questions: Dictation,
Part writing, Composition:
7 exercises
Percent of Total Score: 45%
Time: approximately
1 hour 10 minutes
Part B:
Number of Questions:
Sight-singing: 2 exercises
Percent of Total Score: 10%
Time: approximately
10 minutes per student
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 1 hour 20 minutes
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each testing
room
• Master Sight-singing CD for each
testing room
• One CD player with external speakers
for each testing room
• If recording student responses using a
tape recorder:
– Student response tape, and
– Tape recorder with microphone
for each testing room
• If recording student responses
digitally:
– Computer, work station, or
handheld digital recorder in
sealable quart-size plastic storage
bags for each testing room
• Answer sheets
•
•
•
•
•
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
IMPORTANT — Beginning this year: Students’ sight-singing responses recorded digitally will
be submitted via the Digital Audio Submission (DAS) portal, which will replace submission of
responses on CD for Music Theory only. Follow the instructions under “Saving and Naming MP3
Files” on page 212 of this AP Exam Instructions book.
NEW: School-owned handheld digital recording devices that meet the acceptable criteria on
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital may be used for recording students’
sight-singing responses on Section II, Part B.
194
AP Exam Instructions
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed
on testing day. See “AP Music Theory Exams” in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for
more information. We strongly encourage schools to provide students with multiple opportunities
throughout the year to practice making recordings using the method that will be used on exam day.
You will need the master listening CD for Part A of both Section I and Section II. You will need
the master sight-singing CD for Part B of Section II. If recording student responses using a tape
recorder, you will also need a blank student-response tape for each student taking the exam. It’s a
good idea to have extra blank tapes on hand.
The following instructions assume that the sight-singing part of the exam will be administered
after Part A of Section II and that the general directions for the sight-singing part will be read
and heard by all students at the same time. The general directions for sight-singing are on Track 3
of the master listening CD and on Track 2 of the master sight-singing CD. If you use another
option described in “AP Music Theory Exams,” adjust your administration accordingly.
The listening parts must be administered as outlined here regardless of the recording method you
decide to use for the sight-singing part. A list of tracks for both the listening and sight-singing
parts is available at the end of these instructions.
If you plan to administer the sight-singing part of this exam:
• using a tape recorder, use the instructions for the sight-singing part beginning on
page 199 of this AP Exam Instructions book.
• in a digital language lab, use the instructions for the sight-singing part beginning on
page 201 of this AP Exam Instructions book.
• using a computer with MP3 recording software, use the instructions for the sight-singing
part beginning on page 204 of this AP Exam Instructions book. You may also go to
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator for helpful information, including a link to free
MP3 recording software† that can be used for administering AP world language and culture
and Music Theory exams on a PC or Mac computer. We strongly recommend that your
school’s technical consultant be involved in determining if this software program is right
for your school.
• using a handheld digital recorder, use the instructions for the sight-singing part beginning
on page 207 of this AP Exam Instructions book (new this year). You may go to
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital to review the criteria
that handheld digital recorders must meet to comply with AP Program policies.
This is not an AP Program or ETS endorsement of this product. If you experience any problems
during the installation or configuration of this software product only, technical assistance is
available between 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. ET, Monday through Friday. Your school staff can email
AP-MP3Recordertech@ets.org, or call 609-406-5677 for assistance during these hours.
†
195
MUSIC THEORY
IMPORTANT: For AP Exams, the only acceptable digital file format is MP3 when recording
using a digital lab, computer, or handheld digital recorder. It is very important that your
students practice recording MP3 files. Practice materials are available from the Exam
Information page on AP Central. Refer also to “Saving and Naming MP3 Files” on page 212
of this AP Exam Instructions book.
Music Theory
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
! General Instructions for your group.
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 97). When you
have completed the General Instructions, turn on the CD player and insert the master listening
CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to adjust the volume and then stop the CD.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday morning, May 9, and you will be taking the AP Music Theory Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the AP Music Theory Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other
students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam
score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For Music Theory,
you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must complete the answer sheet
using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning on page 2 of
your answer sheet, one response per question. Completely fill in the circles. If
you need to erase, do so carefully and completely. No credit will be given for
196
AP Exam Instructions
anything written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you
may use the margins or any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work.
Are there any questions? . . .
Part A uses recorded musical examples on which the multiple-choice
questions are based. The recording will provide detailed instructions as you
proceed. Open your Section I booklet and we will begin Part A.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the master listening CD. Note Start Time for Part A here
.
Note approximate Stop Time here
. The CD must not be stopped at any time during
the administration of this portion of the exam unless the equipment malfunctions or students
can’t hear a portion because of outside interference. Check that students are marking their answers
in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their shrinkwrapped Section II
booklets. After approximately 45 minutes, you will hear the words “End of Part A. Do not go on to
Part B until you are told to do so. The proctor will now press the pause button.” Pause the CD player.
9
3
6
When you are ready to start Part B, say:
You have 35 minutes for Part B. Turn to Part B and begin.
12
Note Start Time for Part B here
25 minutes, say:
9
3
6
. Note Stop Time here
. After
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
197
MUSIC THEORY
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Music Theory
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but don’t
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
orange booklet aside; you will need it for Part B. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last initials
of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where indicated. This
constitutes your signature and your agreement to the statements on the
front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student Pack
into the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. Item 4 applies to all of exam Section II, including sight-singing. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. For this section, you will use a
pencil to write your responses. Read the directions for Section II, Part A, on the
back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the exam booklet until you are told
to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will follow the recorded instructions for Questions 1 through 4. I will not stop
the recording at any time until the end. When the recording stops, you may go
on without waiting for further instructions. Are there any questions? . . .
START
Part A: Dictation, Part Writing, Composition
Now turn to Question 1 on page 4 of your exam booklet and wait for the
recording to begin.
12
Begin playing Track 2 of the master listening CD. Note Start Time here
. Note
approximate Stop Time here
. The CD must not be stopped at any time during the
9
3
6
198
AP Exam Instructions
administration of Part A unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion
due to outside interference. After approximately 23 minutes, you will hear the words “The
proctor will now press the pause button.” Pause the CD player.
12
After the recording stops, students have 45 minutes to complete Part A. Note Start
Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are using
pencils and that they are writing their answers in the correct areas of the exam booklet, not
on the facing manuscript paper pages. The pages of blank manuscript paper are for scratch
work. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Put your exam booklet on your
desk, face up. Keep the orange booklet but do not open it; you will need it
for Part B, sight-singing. Remain in your seat, without talking, while the
exam materials are collected. . . .
END
Part A: Dictation, Part Writing, Composition
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
START
Part B: Sight-singing (Tape)
Use the following instructions if students are recording their answers on a blank
student-response tape.
TAPE
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON TAPE
When you are ready, say:
I’m going to give each of you a tape for recording your responses.
Remove the shrinkwrap and take the tape out of its case. . . .
An AP number label has to be put on your tape. Get your Student Pack from
under your chair and take out an AP number label. . . .
Without covering the tape spool, put the label on the front in the space
indicated. Your tape will not be scored if your AP number is not on
the tape. . . .
Unless you check the “No” box on the tape, you give permission to the
College Board to use your taped responses for educational research and
instructional purposes. Now put the tape in your tape recorder, with Side 1
facing out. . . .
199
MUSIC THEORY
Give each student a blank student-response tape. Then say:
Music Theory
TAPE
Explain your plans for recording students’ sight-singing performances. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until I tell you to do so.
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on your desk
except a pencil, tape recorder, and orange booklet. . . .
The instructions for sight-singing have been recorded. They are also printed
on the front cover of your orange booklet. Follow along as you listen to the
instructions, but do not open the orange booklet yet.
Begin playing Track 3 of the master listening CD (or Track 2 on the master sight-singing
CD). After approximately 3 minutes you will hear the words “End of general directions.
The proctor will now press the stop button.” Stop the CD player. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Collect all of the sealed orange booklets before asking students to take their Student
Packs and their blank student-response tapes and go to the place where they will wait to
individually perform the sight-singing melodies. Take the orange booklets to the proctor(s)
administering sight-singing in the performance room(s).
Before the first student comes into the performance room, turn on the CD player and insert
the master sight-singing CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to adjust the volume. Only
one student at a time may practice and perform the sight-singing part. Ensure that the
students waiting cannot hear the performance. As each student comes into the room,
have the student take a seat in front of the tape recorder and then return his or her orange
booklet. When you are ready, say:
I am now going to ask you to record your AP number, and we’ll test to
make sure everything is working. Check that your tape is on Side 1. Use
the fast forward button to advance the tape beyond the colored leader
portion. When I tell you to, start recording and say, “My AP number is . . .”
and record your AP number. Then stop your tape recorder. Go ahead
and record. . . .
Now rewind your tape and play back what you recorded. After you have
heard your voice clearly saying your complete AP number, stop your
tape recorder. . . .
Now set up the tape recorder so that when you release the pause
button, the tape recorder will record your performance. . . .
The master recording will instruct you when it is time to practice
and when it is time to record each melody. You should record your
performance at a normal singing level. Let me know if you cannot hear
the master recording or if you have trouble with the equipment. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
200
AP Exam Instructions
TAPE
stop the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes in
the orange booklet. Are there any questions? . . .
Now using your finger, break the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel
the seals away from the booklet. Do not open the orange booklet yet.
Listen to the master recording, and follow the instructions.
Begin playing Track 1 on the master sight-singing CD. The recording cautions the student
that he or she may not use a metronome or any other device for assistance. However, the
student may tap a foot, tap the table, or silently conduct for himself or herself. Be aware
that the student is following the recorded instructions that guide his or her practice and
performance of the two melodies.
At the end of the recorded exercise, the student will be asked to stop and rewind the tape
and check that the performance has been recorded properly.
When you hear the words “End of Section II, Part B. The proctor will now press the stop
button,” stop the CD and say:
After you have finished checking your tape, please rewind it completely. . . .
While the student rewinds the response tape, you should prepare the master CD for the next
student. If you confirm that a student’s recording is, for technical reasons, inaudible, have that
student repeat the sight-singing exercise immediately. If everything has recorded properly,
verify that the student has placed an AP number label on the tape. If the student recorded his
or her responses on Side 2, check the appropriate box on the tape. Then say:
Put your orange booklet and your response tape on the desk. I also need
to collect your Student Pack if you will be taking another AP Exam. If
you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and tape. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year.
END
START
DIGITAL
LAB
Part B: Sight-singing (Tape)
Part B: Sight-singing (Digital Language Lab)
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES IN A
DIGITAL LANGUAGE LAB
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Music Theory Exam, [Form __].” The form
201
MUSIC THEORY
Collect the orange booklet, the student-response tape, and Student Pack (if necessary). Check
each tape and orange booklet for the student’s AP number label. If you have students who
have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP number label on their tape and orange
booklet before they leave the testing room or they will not receive credit for their responses. If
a student recorded on Side 2 of the tape, complete an Incident Report Form. On the Incident
Report Form select “Other” as the type of incident, and complete the “Incident DetailExplanation” area. Now go to page 211 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
Music Theory
DIGITAL
LAB
(e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II sight-singing booklet in
the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder until they are
later uploaded to the DAS portal.
Use these instructions if you are recording students’ answers in a digital language
lab. The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses
when recording using a digital language lab. At various points, there will be two sets of
instructions: one if students can control their own recordings, and one if you or another
proctor controls student recordings from a master console. Students should NOT wear
headsets during the sight-singing portion of the examination. Play the master CD sightsinging track over the room’s speakers. Follow the instructions accordingly.
When you are ready, say:
Does everyone have a sealed orange booklet, a pencil, and your
Student Pack? . . .
Explain your plans for recording students’ sight-singing performances. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until I tell you to do so.
Now this is important. Take an AP number label from your Student Pack
and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the “At a
Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your AP
number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board
to use your recorded responses for educational research and
instructional purposes. . . .
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on
your desk except a pencil and your orange booklet. . . .
The instructions for sight-singing have been recorded. They are also
printed on the front cover of your orange booklet. Follow along as you
listen to the instructions but do not open the orange booklet yet.
Begin playing Track 3 of the master listening CD (or Track 2 on the master sight-singing
CD). After approximately 3 minutes you will hear the words “End of general directions.
The proctor will now press the stop button.” Stop the CD player. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Collect all of the sealed orange booklets before asking students to take their Student Packs
and go to the place where they will wait to individually perform the sight-singing melodies.
Take the orange booklets to the proctor(s) administering sight-singing in the digital
language lab.
Before administering sight-singing, set up the room following your lab manufacturer’s
instructions. From the console, make sure that the station the students will be using is on
and the correct recording and save file format are activated.
Only one student at a time may practice and perform the sight-singing part. Ensure that
the students waiting cannot hear the performance. As each student comes into the room,
202
AP Exam Instructions
DIGITAL
LAB
have the student take a seat at the station you have set up and then return his or her orange
booklet. When you are ready to begin, say:
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except your orange booklet and
a pencil. . . .
Read the following if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a
master console:
Your recordings will be started, paused, and stopped from this console.
You will not need to do anything when you hear these instructions. You
should record your performance at a normal singing level.
Read the following if students can control their recordings:
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your performance.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so. You should record your performance at a normal singing level.
Continue for all administrations:
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number.
If the student can adjust his or her volume and check his or her recording, say:
Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice
has recorded properly. . . .
Have you recorded properly? . . .
If you or another proctor controls student recordings from a master console, start the student
recording and say:
Go ahead and say your AP number. . . .
Continue for all administrations:
The voice on the master recording will instruct you when it is time to
practice and when it is time to record each melody. The recording will
be played over the room’s speakers. Let me know if you cannot hear the
master recording or if you have trouble with the equipment. I will not
replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
stop the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes in the
orange booklet.
203
MUSIC THEORY
Once the student has spoken his or her AP number, stop the recording and check that the
student’s AP number has recorded properly.
Music Theory
DIGITAL
LAB
Are there any questions? . . .
Now using your finger, break the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel
the seals away from the booklet. Do not open the orange booklet yet. Listen
to the master recording, and follow the instructions.
Begin playing Track 1 on the master sight-singing CD. The recording cautions the student
that he or she may not use a metronome or any other device for assistance. However, the
student may tap a foot, tap the table, or silently conduct for himself or herself. Be aware
that the student is following the recorded instructions that guide his or her practice and
performance of the two melodies.
At the end of the recorded exercise, students are directed to check to be sure their
performances have recorded properly. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, have
that student repeat the sight-singing exercise immediately.
When you hear the words “End of Section II, Part B. The proctor will now press the stop
button,” stop the master CD and say:
I need to collect your Student Pack if you will be taking another AP
Exam. If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your
desk next to your orange booklet. You may keep your Student Pack only
if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your seat,
without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put
an AP number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. Now go to
page 211 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
END
START
COMPUTER
Part B: Sight-singing (Digital Language Lab)
Part B: Sight-singing (Computer with MP3 Software)
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON
COMPUTER WITH MP3 SOFTWARE
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Music Theory Exam, [Form __].” The form
(e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II sight-singing booklet in the
lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder until they are later
uploaded to the DAS portal.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a computer,
using MP3 recording software. Be aware of the requirements for recording student
responses using a computer:
1.School-owned laptops may be used only if they remain in the school at all times and are
not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned laptops may not be used
under any circumstances.
204
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
2.
The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses when
recording using a computer. Check your software well before the exam administration to
be sure it is capable of recording and saving in MP3 format. If not, please use the software
program described on www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
3.Each student’s responses must be recorded as one MP3 file. Therefore, for most software
packages, the “STOP” button should not be pressed until Part B is finished. Pressing
“STOP” before recording is finished may create two files and overwrite earlier work.
4.Each student’s recorded file must begin with his or her AP number. If you use the
student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to record it
again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
The following instructions assume that the sight-singing part of the exam will be
administered after Part A of Section II and that the general directions for the sight-singing
component will be read and heard by all students at the same time. The general directions
for sight-singing are on Track 3 of the master listening CD and on Track 2 of the master
sight-singing CD. If you use another option described in “AP Music Theory Exam” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual, adjust your administration accordingly.
When you are ready, say:
Does everyone have a sealed orange booklet, a pencil, and your
Student Pack? . . .
Explain your plans for recording students’ sight-singing performances. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until I tell you to do so. Now
this is important. Take an AP number label from your Student Pack and
place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the “At a
Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your
recorded responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
The instructions for sight-singing have been recorded. They are also
printed on the front cover of your orange booklet. Follow along as you
listen to the instructions but do not open the orange booklet yet.
Begin playing Track 3 of the master listening CD (or Track 2 on the master sight-singing
CD). After approximately 3 minutes you will hear the words “End of general directions. The
proctor will now press the stop button.” Stop the CD player. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Collect all of the sealed orange booklets before asking students to take their Student Packs
and go to the place where they will wait to individually perform the sight-singing melodies.
Take the orange booklets to the proctor(s) administering sight-singing at the computer.
205
MUSIC THEORY
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on
your desk except a pencil and your orange booklet. . . .
Music Theory
COMPUTER
Before each student enters the room, make sure all computers are on and that the correct
recording and save file format are activated.
Only one student at a time may practice and perform the sight-singing part. Ensure that the
students waiting cannot hear the performance. As each student comes into the room, have the
student take a seat at the computer you have set up and then return his or her orange booklet.
When you are ready to begin, say:
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pencil and your orange booklet. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your performance.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to do
so by the voice on the recording. You should record your performance at a
normal singing level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. Now move the microphone to the best
position to achieve a good recording level. When I tell you to, say, “My AP
number is . . .” and record your AP number. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice has
recorded properly. Click the “PLAY” button to replay this test recording. . . .
Have you recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please delete your test recording and look up.
The voice on the master recording will instruct you when it is time to
practice and when it is time to record each melody. If at any time you cannot
hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will not replay the recording if
you don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the recording unless the
equipment fails.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Using your finger, break the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the
seals away from the booklet. Do not open the orange booklet yet. Listen
to the master recording, and follow the instructions.
MPORTANT: If your MP3 recording software requires students to deselect the
! I“PAUSE”
button before they can continue their recording, you must remind them to do
so. If they do not follow the correct recording process for your software, their files may
not record properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
206
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
Begin playing Track 1 on the master sight-singing CD. The recording cautions the student
that he or she may not use a metronome or any other device for assistance. However, the
student may tap a foot, tap the table, or silently conduct for himself or herself. Be aware that
the student is following the recorded instructions that guide his or her practice and
performance of the two melodies.
At the end of the recorded exercise, students are directed to check to be sure their
performances have recorded properly. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, have that
student repeat the sight-singing exercise immediately.
When you hear the words “End of Section II, Part B. The proctor will now press the stop
button,” stop the master CD and say:
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file.
You should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice
has been recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise
your hand and I will help you. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet. You may keep your Student Pack only if
you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your seat,
without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room.
END
START
Part B: Sight-singing (Computer with MP3 Software)
Part B: Sight-singing (Handheld Digital Recorder)
HANDHELD
DIGITAL RECORDER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES USING A
HANDHELD DIGITAL RECORDER
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a handheld
digital recorder.
1.School-owned handheld digital recorders may be used if they remain in the school at
all times and are not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned devices
may not be used under any circumstances.
2.If the device includes features for wireless communication over a network — including
cellular, Bluetooth®, or WiFi — the communication capability MUST be disabled.
3.If the device includes features for taking pictures or video such as a built-in camera or
webcam, the camera or webcam MUST be disabled.
207
MUSIC THEORY
Be aware of the requirements for recording student responses using a handheld digital
recorder:
Music Theory
HANDHELD
DIGITAL RECORDER
4.
The device MUST be capable of saving the recorded audio as an MP3 formatted
digital file. No other audio file format (e.g., WAV, WMA, or AAC) is acceptable.
5.The device MUST have the ability to record (begin the recording), stop (stop/end the
recording), and pause/unpause (temporarily suspend the recording and then continue
recording). The stop (or a separate save) control should create a digital file that
contains the recording.
6.The device MUST include a means to move or copy digital files from the device to an
external computer. Most devices do so via a USB port and cable or removable media
(SD card); either is acceptable.
7.Each student’s recorded response must begin with his or her AP number. If you use
the student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to
record it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Music Theory Exam, [Form __].” The form
(e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II sight-singing booklet in the
lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this folder until they are later
uploaded to the DAS portal.
Instructions:
The following instructions assume that the sight-singing part of the exam will be
administered after Part A of Section II and that the general directions for the sight-singing
component will be read and heard by all students at the same time. The general directions
for sight-singing are on Track 3 of the master listening CD and on Track 2 of the master
sight-singing CD. If you use another option described in “AP Music Theory Exam” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual, adjust your administration accordingly.
When you are ready say:
Does everyone have a sealed orange booklet, a pencil, and your Student
Pack? . . .
Explain your plans for recording students’ sight-singing performances. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until I tell you to do so. Now
this is important. Take an AP number label from your Student Pack and
place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the “At a
Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your AP
number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet under
your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your recorded
responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on your
desk except a pencil and your orange booklet. . . .
208
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD
DIGITAL RECORDER
The instructions for sight-singing have been recorded. They are also printed
on the front cover of your orange booklet. Follow along as you listen to the
instructions, but do not open the orange booklet yet.
Begin playing Track 3 of the master listening CD (or Track 2 on the master sight-singing
CD). After approximately 3 minutes you will hear the words “End of general directions. The
proctor will now press the stop button.” Stop the CD player. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Collect all of the sealed orange booklets before asking students to take their Student Packs
and go to the place where they will wait to individually perform the sight-singing melodies.
Take the orange booklets to the proctor(s) administering sight-singing.
Only one student at a time may practice and perform the sight-singing part. Ensure that the
students waiting cannot hear the performance. Before students begin entering the room,
turn on the device and check the battery level. Plug-in/recharge or replace batteries
if required. As each student comes into the room, return his or her orange booklet.
Consider the following suggestion for keeping track of student responses (this is a best
practice, not a requirement):
Figure 1
Before students enter the room, place each
handheld digital recorder in its own sealable quartsize plastic storage bag. Have students place their
AP number label on the bag in the order in which
they record (so that the second student places his
or her AP number label below the first student’s AP
number label and so on) and write their sequence
number in the far left margin of the label. (See
Figure 1.)
When you are ready to begin, say:
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair. You
should have nothing on your desk except a pencil, your orange booklet, and
your handheld digital recorder. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your performance.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed to
do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your performance at
a normal singing level. Do you know how to use the controls and buttons
on the device to record, pause, stop, and erase? If not, please let me know.
209
MUSIC THEORY
After a student finishes using a device, lock that
student’s response file if the device permits you
to do so. When the exam is over, put the device
back into the bag. The person responsible for
transferring the student responses from the device
to a computer and then saving the files will have
the students’ AP numbers.
Music Theory
HANDHELD
DIGITAL RECORDER
!
IMPORTANT: In some models of handheld digital recorders, the “PAUSE” button
is combined with the “PLAY” button. In others, it is combined with the “RECORD”
button. If you don’t see any buttons labeled “PAUSE,” it is very possible that the
“RECORD” button acts as a pause. Be sure that you and the students understand how
to record, pause, stop, and erase using your school’s specific devices before moving
on. If students do not follow the correct recording process, their files may not record
properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, press the “RECORD”
button and say, “My AP number is . . .,” speak your AP number, and then
press the “STOP” button. Go ahead and record your AP number now. . . .
Play your test recording to check that you’ve recorded your AP number and
that your voice has recorded properly. Have you recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please erase your test recording and look up.
The voice on the master recording will instruct you when it is time to
practice and when it is time to record each melody. If at any time you
cannot hear the master recording, let me know. I will not replay the
recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the
recording unless the equipment fails.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
From this point on, you will stop the recording only once, at the very end of
testing. Remember to press the “PAUSE” button between your recordings
when instructed to do so.
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record your AP number now. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Using your finger, break the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the
seals away from the booklet. Do not open the orange booklet yet. Listen to
the master recording and follow the instructions.
Begin playing Track 1 on the master sight-singing CD. The recording cautions the student
that he or she may not use a metronome or any other device for assistance. However, the
student may tap a foot, tap the table, or silently conduct for himself or herself. Be aware
that the student is following the recorded instructions that guide his or her practice and
performance of the two melodies.
At the end of the recorded exercise, students are directed to check to be sure their
performances have recorded properly. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, have that
student repeat the sight-singing exercise immediately.
210
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD
DIGITAL RECORDER
When you hear the words “End of Section II, Part B. The proctor will now press the stop
button,” stop the master CD and say:
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button. You should now listen to
your recording to make sure that your voice has been recorded. In the event
that your voice was not recorded, let me know, and I will help you. . . .
!
IMPORTANT: Before dismissing the student, you must be sure to have the information
needed to match the student response with the correct AP number. Confirm that the
student’s AP number label is on the bag holding the recorder he or she used.
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet. You may keep your Student Pack only if you
are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an AP
number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. The person
responsible for uploading files will need this information to rename each file before
uploading and submitting it.
END
START
Part B: Sight-singing (Handheld Digital Recorder)
Dismissing Students
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any
electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with
anyone unless they are released on the College Board website in about two
days. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any
way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need
the information on this card to view your scores and order AP score
reporting services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
211
MUSIC THEORY
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
Music Theory
As each student is dismissed, make sure there is no contact between students who are
waiting to take the sight-singing part of the exam and those who have already taken it. All
exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use
Only” section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain
seating charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be
retained for a longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their
exam shipments unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
!
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam
materials. This applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. The
booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. The
free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed
unless the questions are released on the College Board website two days after
the exam.
END
START
Dismissing Students
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
SAVING, NAMING, UPLOADING, AND SUBMITTING STUDENT
RESPONSE MP3 FILES
When students have been dismissed, begin the process of saving the files for return to the
AP Program. Note: The file naming convention for Music Theory is new this year. The file
name must include the exam form.
Saving and Naming Files: Digital Language Lab
Follow the lab manufacturer’s directions for collecting and saving each student’s file. Some
labs automatically name the files according to the student station number. If this is the case,
you must rename each file with:
1)Th
e student’s AP number (found by playing the beginning of the recording or
referencing the AP number that is indicated on the student’s orange booklet), and
2)Th
e exam form — O, A, or Z (found at the bottom right-hand corner of the orange
booklet)
For example, if a student’s AP number is 87654321, and the exam form is “O,” that student’s
digital file must be named and saved as 87654321_O.mp3. The file name should include only
the student’s 8-digit AP number, an underscore, the exam form, and the file extension .mp3.
212
AP Exam Instructions
Saving and Naming Files: Computer with MP3 Software
Follow your software manufacturer’s directions for exporting and saving each student’s file
in MP3 format onto your network drive. You must name each file with:
1)Th
e student’s AP number (found by playing the beginning of the recording or
referencing the AP number that is indicated on the student’s orange booklet), and
2)Th
e exam form — O, A, or Z (found at the bottom right-hand corner of the orange
booklet)
For example, if a student’s AP number is 87654321, and the exam form is “O,” that student’s
digital file must be named and saved as 87654321_O.mp3. The file name should include only
the student’s 8-digit AP number, an underscore, the exam form, and the file extension .mp3.
Saving and Naming Files: Handheld Digital Recorder
Follow your device manufacturer’s directions for connecting the device to a computer and
transferring each student’s file in MP3 format onto your network drive. You must name
each file with:
1)Th
e student’s AP number (found by playing the beginning of the recording or
referencing the AP number that is indicated on the student’s orange booklet and/or the
bag containing the recorder), and
2)Th
e exam form — O, A, or Z (found at the bottom right-hand corner of the orange
booklet)
For example, if a student’s AP number is 87654321, and the exam form is “O,” that student’s
digital file must be named and saved as 87654321_O.mp3. The file name should include only
the student’s 8-digit AP number, an underscore, the exam form, and the file extension .mp3.
Saving, Naming, and Submitting Files: All Digital Recording Methods
For this exam, the folder to which you save the files should be named “2016 AP Music Theory
Exam, [Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II
sight-singing booklet in the lower right-hand corner.
Do not save responses to the two individual questions as separate files. Save the entire
student response as a single file. Do not save any other student identification on the file.
213
MUSIC THEORY
!
IMPORTANT: Before beginning the upload and submission process, you will
need to create an account on the DAS portal. All accounts on the DAS portal
are school specific and controlled by the school AP Coordinator. When the DAS
portal is available to accept files, the AP Coordinator at the school will be notified
and provided the necessary information to create an account. Once the AP
Coordinator creates an account, the Coordinator will receive a confirmation email
that includes a school-specific code for creating additional accounts at the school.
With this code and the six-digit school code, school staff can create individual
accounts on the system tied to their school by going to https://apaudio.ets.org.
Music Theory
You are ready to begin the online upload and submission process once you have the
following:
1.All student response files saved in MP3 format and named as the student’s AP
number, an underscore, the form, and the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321_O.mp3).
2.A computer with access to the folder where the files are saved and with a reliable
connection to the Internet
3. An account on the DAS Portal, and
4.Students’ orange booklets. (You will need these to flag any students who did not
grant permission to the College Board to use their recorded responses for educational
research and instructional purposes.)
To begin the upload and submission process:
1.Access the DAS portal (https://apaudio.ets.org) and log in with the username and
password you created earlier.
2. Select the AP Music Theory Exam, and click the upload button to begin the process.
3.The system will prompt you to select the correct form to upload. Open the folder on
the computer where you saved the digital files in MP3 format, and select the files.
4.Review each student’s orange booklet to identify any students who did not grant
permission to the College Board to reproduce the recorded material. Students who did
not wish to grant permission were instructed to write “NO” on the orange booklet.
Indicate the AP numbers of any students who did not grant permission.
5.Once you are satisfied that the correct files have been uploaded and that those for
which students did not grant permission have been marked, click the submit button to
submit the files for scoring.
You must upload and submit sight-singing responses as soon as possible, preferably
directly following the Music Theory Exam, but no later than the close of the next
business day after your school’s last scheduled exam of a particular AP Exam
administration period (i.e., regular or late).
For step-by-step instructions on this process, please consult the DAS portal help:
https://apaudio.ets.org/help
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the
AP Program after your school’s last administration. Refer to page 212 for the tasks
you need to complete before storing materials.
END
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
214
AP Exam Instructions
Following is a list of the tracks for the Master Listening (Section I, Part A; Section II, Part A) and
Master Sight-singing (Section II, Part B) CDs. This list may be used in the following instances:
(1) If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD
for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2) The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved
by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Listening Part of AP Music Theory Exam
Track 1: Section I, Part A
Track 2: Section II, Part A
Track 3: General Instructions — Section II, Part B, Sight-singing
Master Sight-Singing CD: Tracks for the Sight-singing Part of AP Music Theory Exam
Track 1: Section II, Part B — Sight-singing Questions
Track 2: General Instructions — Section II, Part B, Sight-singing
MUSIC THEORY
215
AP® Physics 1: Algebra-Based Exam
Physics 1 and Physics 2
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday afternoon, May 3, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
AP® Physics 2: Algebra-Based Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 4, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday morning, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Calculator allowed
Number of Questions: 50*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Calculator allowed
Number of Questions Physics 1: 5
Number of Questions Physics 2: 4
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink, or pencil
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra calculators
• Extra rulers or straightedges
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Students are permitted to use rulers, straightedges, and four-function, scientific, or graphing
calculators for these entire exams (Sections I and II). Before starting the exam administration,
make sure each student has an appropriate calculator, and any student with a graphing calculator
has a model from the approved list on page 47 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual. See
pages 44–47 of the AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. If a student does not have an
appropriate calculator or has a graphing calculator not on the approved list, you may provide one
from your supply. If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide or does not want
to use a calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45
of the AP Coordinator’s Manual.
216
AP Exam Instructions
Students may have no more than two calculators on their desks. Calculators may not be shared.
Calculator memories do not need to be cleared before or after the exam. Students with HewlettPackard 48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860 graphing calculators may use cards designed for use
with these calculators. Proctors should make sure infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing
each other. Since graphing calculators can be used to store data, including text, proctors
should monitor that students are using their calculators appropriately. Attempts by students
to use the calculator to remove exam questions and/or answers from the room may result in
the cancellation of AP Exam scores.
Tables containing equations commonly used in physics are included in each AP Exam booklet,
for use during the entire exam. Students are NOT allowed to bring their own copies of the
equation tables to the Exam room.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
Physics 1: Algebra-Based
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday afternoon, May 3, and you will be taking the AP Physics 1:
Algebra-Based Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
Physics 2: Algebra-Based
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 4, and you will be taking the AP Physics 2:
Algebra-Based Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday morning, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Physics 2:
Algebra-Based Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
217
PHYSICS 1 AND PHYSICS 2
It is Thursday afternoon, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Physics 1:
Algebra-Based Exam.
Physics 1 and Physics 2
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up
when you have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses on pages 2 and 3 of your answer sheet. Remember, for numbers 1
through 45 on answer sheet page 2, mark only the single best answer to each
question. The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each of these questions.
For this exam, you will use only the circles marked A–D. For numbers 131 through
135 at the bottom of answer sheet page 3, mark the two best answer choices for
each question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space in
the exam booklet for scratch work. Rulers, straightedges, and calculators may
be used for the entire exam. You may place these items on your desk. Are there
any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students
are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
218
AP Exam Instructions
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. Please put all of your calculators under your chair. Your calculators
and all items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must
stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way.
Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break.
You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks
during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check
email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic or
communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
After the break, say:
.
SECTION II: Free Response
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name
and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
219
PHYSICS 1 AND PHYSICS 2
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
Physics 1 and Physics 2
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Rulers, straightedges, and calculators may be used for Section II. Be sure
these items are on your desk. . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible for
pacing yourself, and you may proceed freely from one question to the next.
If you are giving the AP Physics 1: Algebra-Based Exam, say:
Section II has 5 questions. It is suggested that you spend approximately
25 minutes each for questions 2 and 3, and 13 minutes each for questions 1,
4, and 5.
If you are giving the AP Physics 2: Algebra-Based Exam, say:
Section II has 4 questions. It is suggested that you spend approximately
25 minutes each for questions 2 and 3, and 20 minutes each for questions 1
and 4.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black or
dark blue ink or a No. 2 pencil. If you use a pencil, be sure that your writing is
dark enough to be easily read. If you need more paper during the exam, raise
your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write
only your AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not
write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. You should also make
sure that Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that students
are not sharing calculators. After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
220
AP Exam Instructions
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
221
PHYSICS 1 AND PHYSICS 2
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
AP® Physics C: Mechanics Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday afternoon, May 9, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 45 min. Section II Total Time: 45 min.
Section I
Total Time: 45 minutes
Calculator Allowed
Number of Questions: 35*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 45 minutes
Calculator Allowed
Number of Questions: 3
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink, or pencil
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra calculators
• Extra rulers or straightedges
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Students are permitted to use rulers, straightedges, and four-function, scientific, or graphing
calculators for this entire exam (Sections I and II). Before starting the exam administration, make
sure each student has an appropriate calculator, and any student with a graphing calculator has a
model from the approved list on page 47 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual. See pages 44–47
of the AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. If a student does not have an appropriate
calculator or has a graphing calculator not on the approved list, you may provide one from your
supply. If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide or does not want to use a
calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45 of the
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
During the administration of Section II, students may have no more than two calculators on
their desks. Calculators may not be shared. Calculator memories do not need to be cleared before
or after the exam. Students with Hewlett-Packard 48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860 graphing
calculators may use cards designed for use with these calculators. Proctors should make sure
infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing each other. Since graphing calculators can
be used to store data, including text, proctors should monitor that students are using their
calculators appropriately. Attempts by students to use the calculator to remove exam questions
and/or answers from the room may result in the cancellation of AP Exam scores.
222
AP Exam Instructions
Tables containing equations commonly used in physics are included in each AP Exam booklet,
for use during the entire exam. Students are NOT allowed to bring their own copies of the
equation tables to the exam room.
Students may take both Physics C exams, Mechanics only, or Electricity and Magnetism only.
The Mechanics exam is administered first, after which students taking both exams are given a
break. Then the Electricity and Magnetism exam is administered. Prior to testing day, determine
which exams students are taking. Those taking both Physics C exams and those taking Physics C:
Mechanics only should report for the 12 noon start time (11 a.m. in Alaska). Those taking
Electricity and Magnetism only should report to the testing room after the break (approximately
2 p.m., 1 p.m. in Alaska). If all students are taking Electricity and Magnetism only, you must not
begin the exam before 2 p.m.
The two exams are in separate exam packets, and require separate answer sheets. At the
beginning of the session, you will distribute only the packets and answer sheets for Mechanics.
The materials for Electricity and Magnetism will be distributed after the break.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
o not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
! DGeneral
Instructions for your group.
This exam includes survey questions. The time allowed for the survey questions is in addition to
the actual test-taking time.
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Physics C:
Mechanics Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take
out the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up
when you have finished. . . .
223
PHYSICS C: MECHANICS
It is Monday afternoon, May 9, and you will be taking the AP Physics C:
Mechanics Exam.
Physics C: Mechanics
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Rulers, straightedges, and calculators
may be used for the entire exam. You may place these items on your desk.
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 45 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and turn to the last page in your booklet. . . .
You have 2 minutes to answer Questions 101–106. These are survey questions
and will not affect your score. You may not go back to work on any of the
exam questions. You may now begin.
To help you and your proctors make sure students are not working on the exam questions, the
two pages with the survey questions are identified with a large S on the upper corner of each page.
Give students 2 minutes to answer the survey questions. Then say:
Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make
sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on page 1 of your
answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
224
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION II: Free Response
Check that each student has signed the front cover of the sealed Section I booklet. When all
Section I materials have been collected and accounted for, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. Keep it, however, if you will be taking the Physics C: Electricity
and Magnetism exam this afternoon. If you have no other AP Exams to take,
place your Student Pack under your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Rulers, straightedges, and calculators may be used for Section II. Be sure these
items are on your desk. . . .
You have 45 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible for pacing
yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next. You must
write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black or dark blue
ink or a No. 2 pencil. If you use a pencil, be sure that your writing is dark
225
PHYSICS C: MECHANICS
Read Item 4. . . .
Physics C: Mechanics
enough to be easily read. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your
hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only
your AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not write
your name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. You should also make
sure that Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that students
are not sharing calculators. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students who are
taking Mechanics only any electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam and are about to be
dismissed say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
226
AP Exam Instructions
If no students are taking Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism, say:
You are now dismissed.
If some students are taking Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism, say:
Those of you taking Mechanics only are now dismissed.
The students taking the Electricity and Magnetism exam now get a 10-minute break. Remember
that the Electricity and Magnetism exam cannot begin before 2 p.m., but should start before
3 p.m. After the students taking Mechanics only have left, say:
If you will also be taking the Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism exam,
please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. Please put all of your calculators under your chair. Your calculators
and all items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in
any way. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. If you do not follow these rules, your score will be
canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
If you will be administering Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism at 2 p.m., be sure all
exam materials are kept secure during the break. When the students return from break, turn
to page 228 and begin the exam administration for Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
227
PHYSICS C: MECHANICS
If you have no students taking Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism, all exam materials must
be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program after your school’s last
administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only” section on page 1 of the
answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
AP® Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday afternoon, May 9, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 45 min. Section II Total Time: 45 min.
Section I
Total Time: 45 minutes
Calculator Allowed
Number of Questions: 35*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 45 minutes
Calculator Allowed
Number of Questions: 3
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black or
dark blue ink, or pencil
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra calculators
• Extra rulers or straightedges
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Students are permitted to use rulers, straightedges, and four-function, scientific, or graphing
calculators for the entire exam (Sections I and II). Before starting the exam administration, make
sure each student has an appropriate calculator, and any student with a graphing calculator has a
model from the approved list on page 47 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual. See pages 44–47
of the AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. If a student does not have an appropriate
calculator or has a graphing calculator not on the approved list, you may provide one from your
supply. If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide or does not want to use a
calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45 of the
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
During the administration of Section II, students may have no more than two calculators on
their desks. Calculators may not be shared. Calculator memories do not need to be cleared before
or after the exam. Students with Hewlett-Packard 48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860 graphing
calculators may use cards designed for use with these calculators. Proctors should make sure
infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing each other. Since graphing calculators can
be used to store data, including text, proctors should monitor that students are using their
calculators appropriately. Attempts by students to use the calculator to remove exam questions
and/or answers from the room may result in the cancellation of AP Exam scores.
228
AP Exam Instructions
Tables containing equations commonly used in physics are included in each AP Exam booklet, for
use during the entire exam. Students are NOT allowed to bring their own copies of the equation
tables to the exam room.
Students may take both Physics C exams, Mechanics only, or Electricity and Magnetism only. The
Mechanics exam is administered first, after which students taking both exams are given a break.
Then the Electricity and Magnetism exam is administered. Prior to testing day, determine which
students are taking only Electricity and Magnetism, and tell them to report to the testing room
at approximately 2 p.m. (1 p.m. in Alaska). You should instruct them to wait quietly outside the
room until told to come in, since students taking Mechanics may not have been dismissed yet. If
all students are taking Electricity and Magnetism only, you must not begin the exam before 2 p.m.
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
This exam includes survey questions. The time allowed for the survey questions is in addition to
the actual test-taking time.
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday afternoon, May 9, and you will be taking the AP Physics C:
Electricity and Magnetism Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Physics C:
Electricity and Magnetism Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
229
PHYSICS C: ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Rulers, straightedges, and calculators
may be used for the entire exam. You may place these items on your desk.
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 45 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and turn to the last page of your booklet. . . .
You have 2 minutes to answer Questions 101–106. These are survey
questions and will not affect your score. You may not go back to work on
any of the exam questions. You may now begin.
To help you and your proctors make sure students are not working on the exam questions, the
two pages with the survey questions are identified with a large S on the upper corner of each page.
Give students 2 minutes to answer the survey questions. Then say:
Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make
sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on page 1 of your
answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP
number label and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
230
AP Exam Instructions
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
SECTION II: Free Response
Check that each student has signed the front cover of the sealed Section I booklet. When all
Section I materials have been collected and accounted for, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Rulers, straightedges, and calculators may be used for Section II. Be sure these
items are on your desk. . . .
231
PHYSICS C: ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism
You have 45 minutes to complete Section II. You are responsible for pacing
yourself and may proceed freely from one question to the next. You must
write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black or dark blue
ink or a No. 2 pencil. If you use a pencil, be sure that your writing is dark
enough to be easily read. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your
hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use be sure to write only
your AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not write
your name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. You should also make
sure that Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that students
are not sharing calculators. After 35 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
232
AP Exam Instructions
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
233
PHYSICS C: ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Psychology
AP® Psychology Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Monday afternoon, May 2, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday morning, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 10 min. Section II Total Time: 50 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 10 minutes
Number of Questions: 100*
Percent of Total Score: 66.6%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 50 minutes
Number of Questions: 2 essays
Percent of Total Score: 33.3%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Monday afternoon, May 2, and you will be taking the AP Psychology Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday morning, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Psychology Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
234
AP Exam Instructions
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully
and completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam
booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any
blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 10 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. After 1 hour, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
235
PSYCHOLOGY
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Psychology
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during the
break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email, use
a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication device.
Remember, you may never discuss the multiple-choice questions at any time
in any form with anyone, including your teacher and other students. If you
disclose these questions through any means, your AP Exam score will be
canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
236
AP Exam Instructions
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams
this year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack
under your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 50 minutes to complete Section II. It is suggested that you divide
your time equally between the two questions. You may use page 3 and
the unlined pages of the booklet to organize your answers and for scratch
work, but you must write your answers on the lined pages provided for each
question. Begin each answer on the first lined page facing the question.
The questions are repeated for your convenience. You are responsible for
pacing yourself, and you may proceed freely from one question to the next.
You must write your answers in the exam booklet using a pen with black
or dark blue ink. If you need more paper during the exam, raise your hand.
At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only your
AP number and the question number you are working on. Do not write your
name. Are there any questions? . . .
You may begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
237
PSYCHOLOGY
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Psychology
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
238
AP® Spanish Language and Culture
AP ExamExam
Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday morning, May 3, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 19, 2016
Section I Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 35 min.
Section I
Total Time: Approx. 1 hour 35 minutes
Number of Questions: 65*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hr. 28 min.
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks without audio stimuli
Tasks with audio stimuli
Time: 40 minutes
Time: approximately
55 minutes
Part A:
Part B:
Tasks with written responses
Tasks with spoken responses
Time: approximately
70 minutes
Time: approximately
18 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: Approx. 1 hour 28 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
•
•
•
•
NEW: School-owned handheld digital recording devices that meet the acceptable criteria on
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital may be used for recording students’
responses for Part B of Section II of the AP Spanish Language and Culture Exam.
Before exam day, the AP Coordinator should determine how best to administer the Spanish
Language and Culture free-response section. The AP Coordinator should review the options
described in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual and choose the best option based on your
school’s resources and the number of students testing. The instructions that follow are based
on administering the exam in the standard sequence. The Email Reply task, Persuasive Essay
239
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each testing room
• Master Persuasive Essay/Speaking Double
CD set for each testing room
• One CD player with external speakers for
each testing room
• Student-response tapes or CDs
• If recording student responses using a tape
recorder:
– Student response tapes, and
– Tape recorders with microphone
• If recording student responses digitally:
– Computers, work stations, or handheld
digital recording devices in sealable
quart-size plastic storage bags
• Answer sheets
• AP Student Packs
Spanish Language and Culture
task, and Speaking part have been labeled to aid proctors using options other than the standard
sequence; you may find it helpful to note the sequence of the selected option in the margins of
these pages. Also, keep in mind the following:
• Section I must be administered first regardless of the sequence in which you administer the
parts of the Section II.
• Make sure students do not open the sealed orange booklets until they are told to do so.
• Collect students’ exam materials before moving to other rooms and redistribute them in the
new room.
• Collect Student Packs only at the completion of all testing.
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed
on testing day. See “AP French, German, Italian, and Spanish Language and Culture Exams” in
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for more information. We strongly encourage schools to
provide students with multiple opportunities throughout the year to practice making recordings
using the method that will be used on exam day.
You will need the master listening CD for Section I, Part B. You will also need the double
CD set, which contains the master CDs for the Persuasive Essay task and the Speaking part for
Section II. A list of tracks for all master audio CDs is available at the end of these instructions.
A blank student-response tape or CD is provided for each student taking the exam. It’s a good
idea to have extra blank tapes or CDs on hand.
If you plan to administer the speaking part of this exam:
• using a tape recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 245 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• in a digital language lab, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning on page 248 of
this AP Exam Instructions book.
• using a computer with MP3 recording software, use the instructions for the speaking
part beginning on page 251 of this AP Exam Instructions book. You may also go to
www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator for helpful information, including a link to free
MP3 recording software† that can be used for administering AP world language and culture
and Music Theory exams on a PC or Mac computer. We strongly recommend that your
school’s technical consultant be involved in determining if this software program is right
for your school.
• using a handheld digital recorder, use the instructions for the speaking part beginning
on page 253 of this AP Exam Instructions book (new this year). You may go to
professionals.collegeboard.com/testing/ap/test-day/digital to review the criteria that
handheld digital recorders must meet to comply with AP Program policies.
This is not an AP Program or ETS endorsement of this product. If you experience any problems
during the installation or configuration of this software product only, technical assistance is
available between 8 a.m. and 8 p.m. ET, Monday through Friday. Your school staff can email
AP-MP3Recordertech@ets.org, or call 609-406-5677 for assistance during these hours.
† IMPORTANT: For AP Exams, the only acceptable digital file format is MP3 when recording
using a digital lab, computer, or handheld digital recorder. It is very important that your
students practice recording MP3 files. Practice materials are available from the Exam
Information page on AP Central. Refer also to “Saving and Naming MP3 Files” on page 258
of this AP Exam Instructions book.
240
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure that you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a
seating chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See
the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52, 91–92).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday morning, May 3, and you will be taking the AP Spanish
Language and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 19, and you will be taking the AP Spanish
Language and Culture Exam.
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up
when you have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The instructions inside the exam booklets are in English and Spanish. Choose
the language you are more comfortable with; do not spend time reading both.
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should
have in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet.
Open your answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific
multiple-choice questions at any time in any form, with anyone, including
your teacher and other students. If you disclose these questions through any
means, your AP Exam score will be canceled.
241
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Spanish Language and Culture
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For Spanish
Language and Culture, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must
complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Section I takes approximately 1 hour and 35 minutes and is divided into two
parts. You will have 40 minutes for Section I, Part A. When you are finished,
you may check your work but you may not move on to Part B until you are
told to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time for Part A here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that
6
students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are only
working on Part A as indicated by the letter A across the top of each page. After 30 minutes, say:
9
3
There are 10 minutes remaining for Part A.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working.
Turn on the CD player and insert the master listening CD. Play the first sentence of the CD to
adjust the volume and then stop the CD. Say:
You will have approximately 55 minutes for Part B.
I will not stop the CD until the end of Part B. Turn to Part B in your exam
booklet and wait for the recording to begin. Raise your hand if you do not
hear the recording.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time for Part B here
. Note Stop
Time here
. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer
sheets and that they are only working on the pages that correspond to Part B, as indicated by the
letter B across the top of each page. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning Part B, you will
hear “End of recording.” At that point, stop the CD player, remove the master listening CD from
the CD player, and say:
9
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Read Item Q on your answer
sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles and look up when you have finished. . . .
Give students 1 minute to complete Item Q. Then say:
Put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make sure your AP number
label and an AP Exam label are on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly
while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that an AP number label and an AP Exam
label have been applied to page 1. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
242
AP Exam Instructions
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or
textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
After the break, say:
.
SECTION II: Free Response
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but don’t
break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
orange booklet aside; you will need it for Part B. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the Section II
exam booklet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student Pack
in the boxes. . . .
243
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
9
Spanish Language and Culture
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. Read the information on the back
cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the exam booklet or break the seals on
the orange booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You may use any blank space to organize your thoughts and for scratch
work, but you must write your responses on the lined pages in the exam
booklet using a pen with black or dark blue ink. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you
use, be sure to write only your AP number and the number of the task you
are working on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
START
Task 1: Email Reply
Say:
You have 15 minutes to complete Task 1, the Email Reply task.
You may work only on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated
by the number 1 across the top of each page. You may review your
response if you finish before the end of Task 1 is announced but you may
not go on to Task 2. Are there any questions? . . .
Open your exam booklet to Part A, Task 1, and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students
are using pens and that they are working only on the pages that correspond to Task 1. After
15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
Stop working.
END
START
Task 1: Email Reply
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
Turn on the CD player and insert the master CD for Task 2, the Persuasive Essay task. Play
the first sentence of Track 1 of the CD so that you can adjust the volume, and then stop the
CD. Then say:
You have approximately 55 minutes to complete Task 2, the Persuasive
Essay task.
Turn to Part A, Task 2, in your exam booklet. You will be working now
on the pages that correspond to this task, as indicated by the number 2
across the top of each page.
244
AP Exam Instructions
Please wait for the recording to begin. I will not stop the CD until the end.
If you finish your work on Task 2 before time is called, you may check your
responses for both Task 1 and Task 2.
Are there any questions? . . .
Raise your hand if you do not hear the recording.
12
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time
here
. Approximately 55 minutes after beginning the task, you will hear “End of
recording.” At that point, stop the CD player. Then say:
9
3
6
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Put your Section II exam
booklet on your desk, face up. Keep the sealed orange booklet; you will
need it for Part B, Speaking.
END
Task 2: Persuasive Essay
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
START
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
Use the following instructions if students are recording their responses on a blank
student-response tape.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include
time for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, and handing out exam
materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD
245
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students per
exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required information is
provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident Report return envelope
(see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details). Then say:
Spanish Language and Culture
so you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the
master recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
TA PE
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON TAPE
When you are ready, say:
I’m going to give each of you a tape for recording your responses.
Give each student a blank student-response tape. Then say:
Remove the shrinkwrap and take the tape out of its case. . . .
An AP number label has to be put on your tape. Get your Student Pack
from under your chair and take out an AP number label. . . .
Without covering the tape spool, put the label on the front in the space
indicated. Your tape will not be scored if your AP number is not on
the tape. . . .
Unless you check the “No” box on the tape, you give permission to the
College Board to use your recorded responses for educational research
and instructional purposes. Now put the tape in your tape recorder, with
Side 1 facing out. . . .
When all tapes are in position, say:
Don’t break the seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so.
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record
your AP number. . . .
Put your Student Pack under your chair. You should have nothing on
your desk except a pen, tape recorder and orange booklet. . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
I am now going to ask you to record your AP number, and then we’ll test
to make sure everything is working. Check that your tape is on Side 1.
Use the fast forward button to advance the tape beyond the colored
leader portion. When I tell you to, start recording and say, “My AP
number is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Then stop your
tape recorder. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now rewind your tape and play back what you recorded. After you have
heard your voice clearly saying your complete AP number, stop your
tape recorder. . . .
246
AP Exam Instructions
TA PE
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may
make it appear that you did not record or complete your response and
could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording or if you have
trouble with your equipment, raise your hand. I will not replay the
recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not stop the
recording unless the equipment fails. You must not stop or pause your
tape unless the recording tells you to do so. You may make notes in the
orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you to do so. Are there
any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break
the seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the
booklet. Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their tapes to be
sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material. When you hear the words
“End of recording,” stop the master CD.
When all students have rewound their tapes and removed them from the tape recorders, say:
If you recorded on Side 2 of the tape, check the box on the tape label
that reads “Check here if Side 2.”. . .
You may now put the tape in its case. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and tape. Remain in your seat, without
talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each tape for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their tape before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. If a student recorded on Side 2 of the tape, complete an Incident
Report Form. On the Incident Report Form select “Other” as the type of incident, and
complete the “Incident Detail — Explanation” area. Now go to page 257 to continue with
instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Tape)
247
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Start the CD Player. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Check that students are operating the equipment properly and that students are not
pausing and stopping their recorders unless they are instructed to do so by the voice
on the recording.
Spanish Language and Culture
START
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
Before the exam administration, create a folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Spanish Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until they are copied later to individual CDs.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses in a digital
language lab. The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam
responses when recording using a digital language lab. At various points, there will
be two sets of instructions: one if students can control their own recordings, and one
if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a master console. Follow the
instructions accordingly.
Before students enter the digital language lab, set up the room following your lab
manufacturer’s instructions. Isolate the student stations as necessary to ensure that students
are directed only to the stations being used. From the console, make sure that all student
stations are on and the correct recording and save file format are activated.
Testing time for Part B is approximately 18 minutes per group. This does not include time
for activities such as giving instructions, seating students, handing out exam materials, etc.
If you are using another room for Part B, collect the sealed orange booklets before asking
students to go to the other room. They need to take their Student Packs with them. When
students are ready to start Part B, return the orange booklets to them and remind them
not to open the booklets until they are told to do so. Students do not have to receive their
original orange booklets.
Seat students in alternate seats/booths, if space permits. While they are being seated, turn
on the CD player and insert the master speaking CD. Play the first sentence of the CD so
you can adjust the volume and then stop the CD. If students will be listening to the master
recording using earphones, make sure they are all channeled in correctly.
The master speaking CD must not be stopped at any time during the administration
of Part B unless the equipment malfunctions or students can’t hear a portion due to
outside interference.
DIGITAL
LAB
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES IN A
DIGITAL LANGUAGE LAB
Once the students enter the room, direct them to the appropriate stations. Instruct students
to put on their headsets and adjust their microphones. When you are ready to begin, say:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a pen,
and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an AP
number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD case.
248
AP Exam Instructions
DIGITAL
LAB
Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information on the
front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the orange
booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record your
AP number. Also, write the number of the station at which you are sitting
so your files can be saved accurately. Now write your name under the AP
number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use your
recorded responses for educational research and instructional purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange booklet,
and your CD. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your
responses at a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your voice
has recorded properly. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
Read the following if you or another proctor controls student recordings from a
master console:
Your recordings will be started, paused, and stopped from this console.
You will not need to do anything when you hear these instructions.
You should record your responses at a normal speaking level.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
249
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Read the following if students can control their recordings:
Spanish Language and Culture
DIGITAL
LAB
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. When I tell you to, say, “My AP number
is . . .” and record your AP number in English.
Start the student recordings and say:
Go ahead and say your AP number. . . .
Once all students have spoken their AP numbers, pause the recording and say:
Sit quietly while I check that you’ve recorded your AP numbers, and
that your voices have recorded properly.
Check that students’ AP numbers have recorded properly.
Continue for all administrations:
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I
will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will
not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. You may make notes
in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you to do so. Are
there any questions? . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of recording.”
Toward the end of the master recording, students are directed to check their recordings to
be sure they have recorded their responses properly and to raise their hands if they have
experienced a problem. If you confirm that a recording is inaudible, that student must
record his or her responses again immediately. It is critical that the recording be done
properly; students can only receive credit for audible material.
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put
an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files. Now
go to page 257 to continue with instructions for dismissing students.
END
Part B: Speaking (Digital Language Lab)
250
AP Exam Instructions
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Before the exam administration, create folder on a local server to save student responses.
In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Spanish Language and Culture Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II freeresponse booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student responses in this
folder until you copy them to individual CDs after students have been dismissed.
Use the following instructions if you are recording students’ responses on a computer,
using MP3 recording software. Be aware of the requirements for recording student
responses using a computer:
1.School-owned laptops may be used only if they remain in the school at all times and are
not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned laptops may not be used
under any circumstances.
2.
The MP3 format is the only acceptable digital file format for AP Exam responses when
recording using a computer. Check your software well before the exam administration to
be sure it is capable of recording and saving in MP3 format. If not, please use the software
program described on www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
4.Each student’s recorded file must begin with his or her AP number. If you use the
student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to record
it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
5. Your exam shipment will contain a student response CD for each student.
Before students enter the room, make sure all computers are on and that the correct
recording and save file format are activated.
COMPUTER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES ON A COMPUTER
WITH MP3 SOFTWARE
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses will
be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a sealed orange booklet, a
pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place an
AP number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on the CD
case. Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the information
on the front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the seals on the
orange booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your Student
Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just below the
251
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
3.Each student’s responses must be recorded as one MP3 file. Therefore, for most software
packages, the “STOP” button should not be pressed until the speaking part is finished.
Pressing “STOP” before recording is finished may create two files and overwrite
earlier work.
Spanish Language and Culture
COMPUTER
“At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you to record
your AP number. Now write your name under the AP number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use
your recorded responses for educational research and instructional
purposes. Are there any questions? . . .
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange
booklet, and your CD. . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when instructed
to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record your
responses at a normal speaking level.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make sure
everything is working properly. Now put on your headset or move the
microphone to the best position to achieve a good recording level.
When I tell you to, say, “My AP number is . . .” and record your AP
number in English. Go ahead and record. . . .
Now check that you’ve recorded your AP number and that your
voice has recorded properly. Click the “PLAY” button to replay
this test recording. . . .
Has everyone recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I will
help you. . . .
Please delete your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand.
I will not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions.
I will not stop the recording unless the equipment fails. Remember to
use the “PAUSE” button when you are instructed to do so.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as
immediately and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response
may make it appear that you did not record or complete your response
and could jeopardize your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell
you to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
Let’s record your AP number now. When you have finished, press the
“PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
252
AP Exam Instructions
COMPUTER
IMPORTANT: If your MP3 recording software requires students to deselect the
!“PAUSE”
button before they can continue their recording, you must remind them to do
so. If they do not follow the correct recording process for your software, their files may
not record properly, and their AP scores may be jeopardized.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words
“End of recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say: If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file.
You should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice
has been recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise
your hand and I will help you. . . .
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk
next to your orange booklet and CD. You may keep your Student Pack
only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain in your
seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
END
START
Part B: Speaking (Computer with MP3 Software)
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
RECORDING STUDENT RESPONSES USING A
HANDHELD DIGITAL RECORDER
Be aware of the requirements for recording student responses using a handheld digital
recorder:
1.School-owned handheld digital recorders may be used if they remain in the school
at all times and are not assigned or issued to individual students. Student-owned
devices may not be used under any circumstances.
2.If the device includes features for wireless communication over a network —
including cellular, Bluetooth®, or WiFi — the communication capability MUST
be disabled.
3.If the device includes features for taking pictures or video such as a built-in camera
or webcam, the camera or webcam MUST be disabled.
4.
The device MUST be capable of saving the recorded audio as an MP3 formatted
digital file. No other audio file format (e.g., WAV, WMA, or AAC) is acceptable.
253
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student. Check each CD for the student’s
AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put
an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room or they will not receive
credit for their responses. You will also require this information for saving MP3 files.
Spanish Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
5.The device MUST have the ability to record (begin the recording), stop (stop/end
the recording), and pause/unpause (temporarily suspend the recording and then
continue recording). The stop (or a separate save) control should create a digital file
that contains the recording.
6.The device MUST include a means to move or copy digital files from the device to
an external computer. Most devices do so via a USB port and cable or removable
media (SD card); either is acceptable.
7.Each student’s recorded response must begin with his or her AP number. If you use
the student’s AP number to test the recorder, be aware that the student may need to
record it again when he or she begins recording responses to exam items.
Before students enter the room, create a folder on a local server to save student
responses. In this case, the folder could be called “2016 AP Spanish Language Exam,
[Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the front cover of the Section II
free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner. You will save all student
responses in this folder until you copy them to individual CDs after students have
been dismissed.
Consider the following suggestion for keeping track of student responses (this is
a best practice, not a requirement):
Figure 1
Before students enter the room, place each
handheld digital recorder in its own sealable
quart-size plastic storage bag. Have students
place their AP number label on the bag in
the order in which they record, if applicable
(so that the second student places his or her
AP number label below the first student’s
AP number label and so on) and write their
sequence number in the far left margin of the
label. (See Figure 1.)
After a student finishes using a device, lock that
student’s response file if the device permits you
to do so. When the exam is over, put the device
back into the bag. The person responsible for
transferring the student responses from the
device to a computer and then saving the files
will have the students’ AP numbers.
Instructions:
I am going to give each of you a blank CD in a case. Your responses
will be transferred to this CD after the exam.
Give each student a blank CD in a case. Then say:
Does everyone have a blank CD in a case, a handheld digital recorder,
a sealed orange booklet, a pen, and your Student Pack? . . .
254
AP Exam Instructions
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Remove the shrinkwrap from the CD case, open the case, and place
an AP number label directly on the CD. Do not place the label on
the CD case. Now close the case and place it to the side. Read the
information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Don’t break the
seals on the orange booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Now this is important. Take another AP number label from your
Student Pack and place it on the front cover of the orange booklet just
below the “At a Glance” box so that you can refer to it when I ask you
to record your AP number. Now write your name under the AP
number label. . . .
One more thing — unless you write “NO” on your orange booklet
under your name, you give permission to the College Board to use
your recorded responses for educational research and instructional
purposes.
Are there any questions? . . .
Follow the instructions from the master CD to record your responses.
You should start, pause, and stop your recording only when
instructed to do so by the voice on the recording. You should record
your responses at a normal speaking level. Does everyone know how
to use the controls and buttons on the device to record, pause, stop,
and erase? If not, please raise your hand. . . .
is combined with the “PLAY” button. In others, it is combined with
! button
the “RECORD” button. If you don’t see any buttons labeled “PAUSE,” it is
IMPORTANT: In some models of handheld digital recorders, the “PAUSE”
very possible that the “RECORD” button acts as a pause. Be sure that you
and the students understand how to record, pause, stop, and erase using your
school’s specific devices before moving on. If students do not follow the correct
recording process, their files may not record properly, and their AP scores may
be jeopardized.
You’ll need to record your AP number, and we’ll test to make
sure everything is working properly. When I tell you to, press the
“RECORD” button and say, “My AP number is . . .,” speak your AP
number in English, and then press the “STOP” button. Go ahead and
record your AP number now. . . .
Play your test recording to check that you’ve recorded your AP
number and that your voice has recorded properly. Has everyone
recorded properly? . . .
In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand and I
will help you. . . .
255
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Put your Student Pack and your personal belongings under your chair.
You should have nothing on your desk except a pen, your orange
booklet, your CD, and a handheld digital recorder. . . .
Spanish Language and Culture
HANDHELD DIGITAL
RECORDER
Please erase your test recording and look up.
If at any time you cannot hear the master recording, raise your hand. I will
not replay the recording if you don’t understand the questions. I will not
stop the recording unless the equipment fails.
It is very important when recording that you try to respond as immediately
and as fully as possible. Long pauses in your response may make it appear
that you did not record or complete your response and could jeopardize
your score on the speaking tasks.
You may make notes in the orange booklet, but don’t open it until I tell you
to do so. Are there any questions? . . .
From this point on, you will stop the recording only once, at the very end of
testing. Remember to press the “PAUSE” button between your recordings
when instructed to do so. Let’s record your AP number now. When you
have finished, press the “PAUSE” button, and look up. Go ahead and record
your AP number now. . . .
Instructions for Part B have been recorded. Using your finger, break the
seals on the orange booklet. Do not peel the seals away from the booklet.
Open the orange booklet. We will now begin Part B.
Start the master CD. Do not stop the recording until you hear the words “End of
recording.”
When you hear the words “End of recording,” stop the master CD, and say:
If you have not done so, press the “STOP” button to complete your file. You
should now listen to your recording to make sure that your voice has been
recorded. In the event that your voice was not recorded, raise your hand
and I will help you. . . .
MPORTANT: Before dismissing the students, you must be sure to have the information
!Ineeded
to match the student responses with the correct AP numbers. Confirm that each
student’s AP number label is on the bag holding the recorder he or she used.
If you are taking another AP Exam, put your Student Pack on your desk next
to your orange booklet, handheld digital recorder, and CD. You may keep your
Student Pack only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this year. Remain
in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Check that you have an orange booklet for each student and that each booklet has an AP
number label. If you have students who have not done this, be sure to have them put an
AP number label on their orange booklet before they leave the testing room. Check each
CD for the student’s AP number label. If you have students who have not done this, be
sure to have them put an AP number label on their CD before they leave the testing room
or they will not receive credit for their responses. You will require this information for
saving MP3 files.
END
Part B: Speaking (Handheld Digital Recorder)
256
AP Exam Instructions
START
Dismissing Students
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any
electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with
anyone unless they are released on the College Board website in about two
days. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any
way at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need
the information on this card to view your scores and order AP score
reporting services online.
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School
Use Only” section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject score
roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the 2015-16
AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain
seating charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be
retained for a longer period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their
exam shipments unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
MPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your
! Iexam
materials. This applies to all exam administrations, including late
testing. These booklets are not to be kept at the school, or returned to students
or teachers. The free-response questions for the regularly scheduled exam
may not be discussed unless the questions are released on the College Board
website two days after the exam.
END
Dismissing Students
257
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Then say:
Spanish Language and Culture
START
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
SAVING AND NAMING MP3 FILES AND PREPARING
STUDENT-RESPONSE CDs FOR RETURN
When students have been dismissed, begin the process of saving the files for return to the
AP Program.
Saving and Naming Files: Digital Language Lab
Follow the lab manufacturer’s directions for collecting and saving each student’s file.
Some labs automatically name the files according to the student station number. If this
is the case, you must rename each file with the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated
on the student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g.,
87654321.mp3). You may need to play the beginning of the recording to check the
AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Computer with MP3 Software
Follow your software manufacturer’s directions for exporting and saving each student’s
file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name should only have the student’s
8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange booklet and CD) followed by the
file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need to play the beginning of the
recording to check the AP number.
Saving and Naming Files: Handheld Digital Recorder
Follow your device manufacturer’s directions for connecting the device to a computer and
transferring each student’s file in MP3 format onto your network drive. The file name
should only have the student’s 8-digit AP number (indicated on the student’s orange
booklet and CD) followed by the file extension .mp3 (e.g., 87654321.mp3). You may need
to play the beginning of the recording to check the AP number.
Burning Files to CDs: All Digital Recording Methods
For this exam, the folder to which you save the files should be named “2016 AP Spanish
Language and Culture Exam, [Form __].” The form (e.g., Form O) can be found on the
front cover of the Section II free-response booklet in the lower right-hand corner.
Do not save responses to individual questions as separate files. Save the entire student
response as a single file. Do not save any other student identification on the file.
After all students’ responses have been saved and renamed (if needed), copy each student’s
MP3 file onto his or her CD. Do not include more than one student’s responses on any CD.
Use one CD per student with all of that student’s responses in one file in order to facilitate
proper scoring. This also ensures that the responses are processed and scored in the same
manner as the tapes.
•• When burning each student’s MP3 file to the provided student-response CD, be
sure to select “Data Disc” or “Data CD” (not “Audio Disc” or “Audio CD”) in the
preferences of your CD-burning application.
•• Do not use applications such as Windows Media Player or iTunes versions that only
allow burning audio discs or CDs. This will help ensure that your students’ responses
can be accessed for scoring.
258
AP Exam Instructions
•• If you recorded on computers using MP3 software, you must select to finalize or
close the CD after burning the file to the CD, using the same software you used
to burn the files. CDs that are not finalized or closed may NOT play on other
computers. Please refer to the software user guide to properly finalize the CD or
close the CD, which will instruct the software to complete the burning session on
the CD.
Check each CD, making sure that the MP3 file has been burned to the CD and
that the file can be played. Failure to properly burn students’ MP3 files to CD
may result in a score delay or an exam part score of zero. It is imperative that you
ensure students’ MP3 files are properly burned to CD, with the burning sessions
completed, in accordance with your software requirements, and that the files be
present and audible on every CD you return for scoring.
Review each student’s orange booklet to identify any students who did not grant permission
to the College Board to reproduce the recorded material. Students who did not wish to
grant permission were instructed to write “NO” on the orange booklet. Using a permanent
marker, make a check mark on the CD next to “NO” for any students who did not grant
permission.
Do not save the content of the master CDs to your school’s computer network server or to a
computer’s hard drive.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP
Program after your school’s last administration. Refer to page 257 for the tasks you need
to complete before storing materials.
END
Saving and Naming MP3 Files
259
SPANISH LANGUAGE AND CULTURE
Make sure the student’s AP number label is on the CD. Place the CD in the case. Once the
students’ responses have been successfully copied to their CDs, delete their files from
the master console or server.
Spanish Language and Culture
Following is the list of tracks for the master listening CD, the master CD for the Persuasive Essay
task, and the master speaking CD. This list may be used in the following instances:
(1) If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD
for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2) The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved
by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in
returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Listening Part of AP Spanish Language and
Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part B
Track 2:
Selection 1
Tracks 3–12: Questions 31–40
Track 13:
Selection 2
Tracks 14–20: Questions 41–47
Track 21:
Selection 3
Tracks 22–26: Questions 48–52
Track 27:
Selection 4
Tracks 28–32: Questions 53–57
Track 33:
Selection 5
Tracks 34–41: Questions 58–65
Track 42:
Directions: End of Part B
Master CD for Persuasive Essay Task: Tracks for the Persuasive Essay Task of AP Spanish
Language and Culture Exam
Track 1: Directions: Task 2
Track 2: Task 2
Track 3: Directions: End of Part A
Master Speaking CD: Tracks for the Speaking Part of AP Spanish Language and
Culture Exam
Track 1: Directions: Part B
Track 2: Directions: Task 3
Track 3: Task 3
Track 4: Task 3a
Track 5: Task 3b
Track 6: Task 3c
Track 7: Task 3d
Track 8: Task 3e
Track 9: Directions: End of Task 3
Track 10: Directions: Task 4
Track 11: Task 4
Track 12: Directions: End of Part B
260
AP® Spanish Literature and Culture Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Tuesday afternoon, May 10, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Friday afternoon, May 20, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 20 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 40 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 20 minutes
Number of Questions: 65*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Part A:
Part B:
Interpretive Listening
Reading analysis
Time: approximately
20 minutes
Time: approximately
60 minutes
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 1 hour 40 minutes
Number of Questions: 4 tasks
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
Questions 1 and 2
(suggested time 15 minutes each)
Questions 3 and 4
(suggested time 35 minutes each)
• Exam packets
• Master Listening CD for each
testing room
• One high quality CD player with
speakers for each testing room
• Answer sheets
• AP Student Packs
• 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
• This book — AP Exam Instructions
• AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
• School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Proctors administering this exam must be thoroughly familiar with all equipment needed on
testing day. See “AP Spanish Literature and Culture Exam” in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s
Manual for more information.
You will need the master listening CD for Section I, Part A. A list of tracks for the master audio
CD can be found at the end of these instructions.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
261
SPANISH LITERATURE AND CULTURE
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
Spanish Literature and Culture
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Tuesday afternoon, May 10, and you will be taking the AP Spanish Literature
and Culture Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Friday afternoon, May 20, and you will be taking the AP Spanish Literature
and Culture Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up
when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
The instructions inside the exam booklets are in English and Spanish.
Choose the language you are more comfortable with; do not spend time
reading both.
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For Spanish
Literature and Culture, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must
complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your
responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
262
AP Exam Instructions
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space
in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
Section I takes approximately 1 hour and 20 minutes and is divided into two
parts. You may make notes in your exam booklet while you are listening to
the recording. I will not stop the recording at any time until the end of Part A.
When the recording for Part A stops, you may go on to Part B without
waiting for further instructions. Are there any questions? . . .
12
You will have approximately 20 minutes for Part A. Open your Section I
booklet to Part A and wait for the recording to begin. Raise your hand if you
do not hear the recording.
Begin playing Track 1 of the CD. Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and
that they are only working on the pages that correspond to Part A. Approximately 20 minutes after
beginning Part A, you will hear “End of recording. . . Fin de la grabación.” At that point, stop the
CD player. Then say:
9
3
6
You may go on to Part B. You have one hour for this part.
Note Start Time for Part B here
. Note Stop Time here
. Remove the
6
master listening CD from the CD player. Check that students are marking their answers in pencil
on their answer sheets and that they are only working on Part B. After 50 minutes, say:
3
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Read Item Q on your answer
sheet. Fill in the appropriate circles and look up when you have finished. . . .
Give students 1 minute to complete Item Q. Then say:
Put your answer sheet on your desk, face up. Make sure you have your AP
number label and an AP Exam label on page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit
quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave your
shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are not
263
SPANISH LITERATURE AND CULTURE
12
9
Spanish Literature and Culture
allowed to consult teachers, other students, or textbooks during the break. You
may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email, use a social
networking site, or access any electronic or communication device. Remember,
you may never discuss the multiple-choice questions at any time in any form
with anyone, including your teacher and other students. If you disclose these
questions through any means, your AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there
any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? For this section of the exam, you will be
using a pen with black or dark blue ink to write your responses. Place your
Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
264
AP Exam Instructions
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 40 minutes to complete Section II. You may use the
pages the questions are printed on to organize your answers and for
scratch work, but you must write your answers on the lined pages. Answer
questions on the lined pages that are assigned to each particular question.
You are responsible for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from one
question to the next. You must write your answers in the exam booklet using
a pen with black or dark blue ink. If you need more paper during the exam,
raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to
write only your AP number and the question number you are working on. Do
not write your name. Open your Section II booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens to write their answers in their exam booklets. After 15 minutes, say:
9
3
6
After 15 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 3.
After 35 minutes, say:
You are advised to move on to Question 4.
After 25 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
265
SPANISH LITERATURE AND CULTURE
You are advised to move on to Question 2.
Spanish Literature and Culture
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your
AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
266
AP Exam Instructions
Following is the list of tracks for the master listening CD. This list may be used in the following
instances:
(1)If interruption of a specific part of the exam administration necessitates stopping the CD
for a time, consult the list to return to the appropriate track to continue the exam.
(2)The list may be photocopied for use by students with disabilities who have been approved
by the College Board SSD Office to test using extended time. It will aid students in
returning to questions for which they need extra time.
Master Listening CD: Tracks for the Interpretive Listening Part of AP Spanish Literature
and Culture Exam
Track 1:
Directions: Part A
Track 2:
Selection #1
Track 3:
Selection #2
Track 4:
Selection #3
Track 5:
Directions: End of Part A
SPANISH LITERATURE AND CULTURE
267
Statistics
AP® Statistics Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Thursday afternoon, May 12, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Graphing calculator expected
Number of Questions: 40*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Graphing calculator expected
Number of Questions: 6
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Either pencil
or pen with black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015 - 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra graphing calculators
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Extra paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
Students are expected to bring graphing calculators with statistical capabilities to the
AP Statistics Exam. Nongraphing scientific calculators are permitted as long as they have
the required computational capabilities. Before starting the exam administration, make
sure each student has a graphing calculator from the approved list on page 47 of the 2015 - 16
AP Coordinator’s Manual or a scientific calculator. It is up to the student to determine if a
nongraphing scientific calculator has the required computational capabilities. If a student does
not have a graphing calculator from the approved list or an appropriate scientific calculator, you
may provide one from your supply. See pages 44–47 of the AP Coordinator’s Manual for more
information. If the student does not want to use the calculator you provide, or does not want to
use a calculator at all, he or she must hand copy, date, and sign the release statement on page 45 of
the AP Coordinator’s Manual.
Students may have no more than two calculators on their desks. Calculators may not be shared.
Calculator memories do not need to be cleared before or after the exam. Students with HewlettPackard 48–50 Series and Casio FX-9860 graphing calculators may use cards designed for use
with these calculators. Proctors should make sure infrared ports (Hewlett-Packard) are not facing
each other. Since graphing calculators can be used to store data, including text, proctors
should monitor that students are using their calculators appropriately. Attempts by students
268
AP Exam Instructions
to use the calculator to remove exam questions and/or answers from the room may result in
the cancellation of AP Exam scores.
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
!
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Thursday afternoon, May 12, and you will be taking the AP Statistics Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the AP Statistics Exam.
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents.
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take
out the Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped
Section II materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name, and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
269
STATISTICS
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Statistics
You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of
your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per
question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and
completely. No credit will be given for anything written in the exam booklet.
Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank
space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Calculators may be used for both
sections of this exam. You may place your calculators on your desk. Are there
any questions? . . .
You have 1 hour and 30 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet
and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II booklets. Proctors should walk around and make sure Hewlett-Packard
calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that students are not sharing calculators.
After 1 hour and 20 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area
of your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over
the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face
up. I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover of
the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during
the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, use your
calculators, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
270
.
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION II: Free Response
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open the exam booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under
“Important Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last
name and the first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you
have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Section II has two parts. You have 1 hour and 30 minutes to complete all of
Section II. You are responsible for pacing yourself and may proceed freely from
one part to the next. You must write your answers in the exam booklet using
a pen with black or dark blue ink or a No. 2 pencil. If you use a pencil, be sure
that your writing is dark enough to be easily read. If you need more paper
during the exam, raise your hand. At the top of each extra sheet of paper you
use, be sure to write only your AP number and the question number you are
working on. Do not write your name. Are there any questions? . . .
271
STATISTICS
Are there any questions? . . .
Statistics
You may begin Part A.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. You should also make
6
sure that Hewlett-Packard calculators’ infrared ports are not facing each other and that students
are not sharing calculators. After 1 hour and 5 minutes, say:
9
3
There are 25 minutes remaining and you may want to move on to Part B,
if you have not already started answering that question.
After 15 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet. Place it on your desk, face up. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
272
AP Exam Instructions
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
STATISTICS
273
AP® Studio Art
AP Studio Art — Drawing and 2-D Design Portfolios
Friday, May 6, 2016 — Last Day for AP Studio Art
Portfolio Assembly for Drawing and 2-D Design
The directions below apply only to the Section I: Quality (Selected Works) section of the Drawing and 2-D Design portfolios. Drawing and 2-D Design students submit Section II: Concentration (Sustained
Investigation) and Section III: Breadth (Range of Approaches) online using the Digital Submission Web
application. 3-D Design students submit ALL sections of their portfolios using the Web application and
therefore do not need to be present at this assembly session. ALL students who have not already done so
must fill out the required information in their Student Packs (see directions on page 276).
It is recommended that you fill in the box below with the appropriate information and then photocopy and
distribute this page to your students. Instructions for portfolio assembly begin on the next page. Studio Art
students do not submit a paper answer sheet with each portfolio; instead, they complete registration
information online when they submit their portfolios using the Digital Submission Web application. The
application also includes an electronic permission form that students fill out regarding possible reproduction
or exhibition of their work. NOTE: If any 3-D Design students do not plan to take any other AP Exams, please
be sure to distribute the Student Packs to these students separately, since they won’t be present at this session.
Studio Art Student (Drawing and 2-D Design only)
Today’s Date:
Pick up your Studio Art portfolio at:
Place:
Date:
Time:
Read the instructions on the outside of your portfolio. The AP number labels referred to are in your 2016 AP Student Pack. Unless your AP Coordinator has already given you your 2016 Student Pack, you will receive it when you bring your portfolio for final assembly. Read and review the detailed information on the portfolio label and on the AP Studio Art brochure about how to pack and label the five works that you submit for Section I: Quality (Selected Works).
Bring your portfolio with your Quality (Selected Works) section materials to:
Place:
Date:
Time:
Be prepared to pack the pieces for your Quality (Selected Works) section and fill out the information requested. This should take
no morethan half an hour. Nothing that identifies you or your school may appear on any of your art materials, unless removing
such information could damage your work. For the safety of your work during shipping, please follow the instructions on the
AP Studio A rt brochure about mounting or matting your work.
Your artwork will be returned via UPS in late June or early July. The address you enter when completing registration information
in the Digital Submission Web application is where your portfolio will be sent. You must supply a street address, not a post office box, since UPS will not deliver to a post office box. ETS does not assume responsibility or liability for loss or damage to portfolio materials while they are in the hands of ETS or in transit. You will be able to track the return shipment of your
portfolio by following the steps below.
Track the return of your artwork:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Keep a record of your AP number:
Log on to the UPS website at www.ups.com
Go to TRACKING in the toolbar at the top of the screen
Go to Track by Reference
The screen will now say Track by Reference. Enter your Shipment Reference, which is “E” + your AP number.
In the Shipment Date Range enter June 1, 2016, in the FROM field and July 15, 2016, as the TO field
Enter the country (e.g., United States) where you live in Destination Country
Enter your ZIP or postal code in Destination ZIP/Postal Code
If you agree to the terms and conditions, click TRACK
274
AP Exam Instructions
What Proctors Need to Bring to the Portfolio Assembly
•
•
•
•
Studio Art portfolio envelopes
AP Student Packs
2015 - 16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
• School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PORTFOLIO ASSEMBLY
You should receive a portfolio envelope for each Drawing and 2-D Design Studio Art student. The
envelope is the same, regardless of what type of portfolio the student is submitting. The portfolios
are sent in special cartons, separate from the rest of your exam materials. As soon as you receive
the carton(s) containing the portfolios, fill in the information in the form on the previous page,
photocopy the form, and give a copy to each Drawing and 2-D Design student. Portfolios should
be distributed to Drawing and 2-D Design students within two days of receipt at the school.
Portfolio envelopes are not sent for 3-D Design students, since 3-D Design students submit their
entire portfolios online.
If a student wants to submit more than one portfolio type, each must be submitted separately.
They may not be combined and assembled in one portfolio envelope. In addition, one fee per
portfolio must be submitted for payment. An Incident Report must be filled out stating which
portfolios the student is submitting. The AP Coordinator and the AP Studio Art teacher should
verify that there is no work that is duplicated between the portfolios — for example, a work that
is submitted as an original in one portfolio may not be submitted as a digital image, whether of
the whole work or a detail, in the other. If these conditions are met, more than one portfolio
may be submitted.
Portfolios and their contents do not constitute secure testing materials. In other words, in
contrast to other AP subjects, the AP Studio Art teacher may be present when students meet
to assemble the Quality (Selected Works) sections of their Drawing and 2-D Design portfolios,
just as they may be present when students upload digital images and work on the other sections
of their portfolios online. You should draw on the Studio Art teacher’s knowledge to help the
students make sure that the portfolios are complete and are accurately presented. The meeting to
assemble the portfolios is not “testing time” in the usual sense.
Students need their AP numbers and list of college codes before they can finalize their digital
portfolios, so the AP Coordinator should distribute AP Student Packs as soon as possible after
the exam shipment arrives. Arrange for your Studio Art students to complete the information on
their Student Packs, confirm that they have their correct AP numbers and college codes, and then
retrieve their Student Packs for safekeeping until needed. For more information about digital
submission, see pages 100–103 in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
275
STUDIO ART
The portfolio envelopes for the Quality (Selected Works) section of the Drawing and 2-D Design
portfolios must be returned to the AP Program before the close of the next business day after the
school’s last scheduled exam. For example, if your last administration is on May 13, they should
be returned no later than May 16. You should assemble Drawing and 2-D Design students for the
portfolio assembly session no later than May 6.
Studio Art
Reading Instructions
Read aloud all the directions in bold. When ellipses (. . .) appear in the text, pause to allow time
for students to follow the instructions. All other instructions are for you and should not be
read aloud. Read the instructions verbatim at a moderate pace. This allows students to hear the
complete instructions, preventing costly errors.
Introduction and Distribution of Materials
May I have everyone’s attention? We are going to complete the assembly of
your portfolios. I am now going to return Student Packs to those of you who
have already completed some of this information. Please look at them to
make sure you have been given your correct materials.
Return Student Packs to those who have already completed the front of their Student Packs.
I will now distribute Student Packs to the rest of you.
Distribute one AP Student Pack to each of the remaining students. Then say:
Is there anyone who does not have a Student Pack and a pen with black or
dark blue ink? . . .
If you have already completed the Student Pack information, please sit
quietly until we begin assembling the portfolios. You may recheck the
information as we go along.
Student Pack and Unique AP Number
Each year that you take AP Exams, you are assigned a new AP number. Your
2016 AP number is located on a sheet of labels in the center of your Student
Pack. You must use these same labels on all AP Exams you take in 2016. If
you run out of number labels at any time during testing, you may write your
AP number in the areas indicated. You may not have a new AP Student Pack
or share labels with anyone. Turn to the sheet of AP number labels in the
center of your Student Pack. . . .
Now, in the upper right-hand corner of the sheet of number labels, write your
name in the space provided. . . .
When you have finished, pull off one label and turn to the back cover of
the Student Pack. Place the label in the top left-hand corner of the College
Information Card, where indicated. . . .
Now I have some very important information about your AP Exam scores. AP
scores are reported to you online only. You do not receive your scores in the
mail. Turn to the inside front cover of your Student Pack and review the steps
you’ll need to take to access your scores online. . . .
Now turn to the back cover of your Student Pack and see the AP number
card at the bottom of the inside flap. Take an AP number label and place it on
the card in the area indicated, write your name on the card and remove the
card from the booklet. Place the card on the floor under your chair for now.
After you have been dismissed, put the card in your wallet, and keep it for
future reference. Do NOT share your AP number with anyone else. You will
need the information on this card to view your scores and order AP score
reporting services online in July. . . .
276
AP Exam Instructions
Now turn to the front cover of your Student Pack. Print your grade level, last
name, first name and middle initial in the spaces indicated. . . .
Now print the six-digit school code for the school you attend. The school
code for [say your school’s name] is __ __ __ __ __ __. If you do not attend [say
your school’s name], enter the code for your school. If you are home-schooled,
the code you should use is posted. If you do not know your school’s code,
leave the space blank. . . .
Print your AP number in the spaces provided. Now fill in the box next to each
AP Exam you plan to take this year. . . .
If you want to send comments or suggestions to the AP Program, or if you
believe there is a problem with the portfolio requirements, please contact
the AP Program directly. Contact information can be found on page 3 of your
Student Pack.
Portfolio Assembly Instructions
The rest of this meeting is to assemble the Quality (Selected Works) section
of Drawing and 2-D Design portfolios only. Your Concentration (Sustained
Investigation) and Breadth (Range of Approaches) sections must be
submitted through the Digital Submission Web application.
We’re now ready to assemble the Quality (Selected Works) section of your
Drawing and 2-D Design portfolios. Please take out the Section I: Quality
(Selected Works) scoring sheets that are in your portfolio and place them on
your desk.
Portfolio Label
Use a pen with black or dark blue ink to print the information requested on
the left-hand side of the large red label on the front of your portfolio. This
information must be identical to the registration information that you entered
online using the AP Studio Art Digital Submission Web application. . . .
Place an AP number label on the scoring sheet that will be used for marking
the scores of your original works for Section I: Quality (Selected Works). For
the Drawing portfolio use the lavender sheet; for 2-D Design, use the pink
sheet. Label only one sheet and discard the other. Print your initials on the
scoring sheet in the spaces provided.
Place an AP number label in the lower right corner on the back of each of your
five works. Be sure the label is in the lower right corner; if there is any doubt
about the orientation of a work (which side is the top), this label will be used
277
STUDIO ART
In the center of the large red label, under Step 3, place a check mark in the
box that indicates which portfolio you are submitting — Drawing or 2-D
Design. Be sure this matches the information you have entered using the
Web application. Next, take one AP number label from the center of your
Student Pack and place it where indicated under Step 4 on the portfolio
label. If the portfolio type and AP number you put on this label do not match
the information entered in the Web application, your score may be delayed.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Studio Art
to make sure it is evaluated right-side up. You can also write “TOP” along
that side on the back of the piece. For either portfolio, works should fit easily
into the portfolio envelope. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Do not submit more than the required number of works. If you do, a
selection will be made based on the order the pieces appear in the portfolio.
Extra or oversized pieces for the Quality (Selected Works) section of the
Drawing or 2-D Design portfolios are not allowed. If the section is incomplete
(fewer than five artworks submitted or fewer than five artworks that meet
the specifications for the section are submitted), your score for that section
will be based on the work remaining in the section, if any.
Inserting Portfolio Materials
Place your materials into the portfolio in the following order:
1. Original works facing the back of the portfolio (the side without
the label)
2. Pink or lavender scoring sheet
Fill in the “Student Check” column on the large red portfolio label under
Step 4. Write in the number of Quality (Selected Works) artworks you are
enclosing and check the box indicating that you are enclosing a completed
grading sheet. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Review the list under Step 5 on the portfolio label, and complete the
“Student Check” column. Then, close the portfolio.
Your portfolio will be returned to you in late June or early July via UPS.
Be sure to write your AP number on the form that you were given telling
you when to pick up your portfolio and the time of this session. Keep the
form for reference so that you can track the return shipment of your
portfolio. Directions for doing this are at the bottom of the form. Are
there any questions? . . .
Answer any questions concerning the assembly procedure described above. When all students
have filled in the checklists and properly inserted materials in their portfolios, say:
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any more AP Exams
this year.
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
I’m now going to collect your portfolios.
As you collect the materials, check the portfolios to be sure each student has been consistent
in filling them out and has correctly indicated which portfolio is being submitted. Fill in the
“Coordinator Check” column in Step 4 on the red portfolio label, verifying the materials that are
enclosed. Review the checklist under Step 5 on the portfolio label, and complete the “Coordinator
Check” column. When you are sure all materials are in order, close the portfolio and say:
Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
278
AP Exam Instructions
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
Portfolios must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program before
the close of the next business day after the school’s last regularly scheduled exam. For
example, if your last administration is on May 13, they should be returned no later than
May 16. Any Incident Report involving a student’s Studio Art portfolio should be placed
in the portfolio envelope, not in the Incident Report return envelope. See “Administration
Incidents” in the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
STUDIO ART
279
AP® United States History Exam
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Friday morning, May 6, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday morning, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 1 hr. 45 min. Section II Total Time: 1 hr. 30 min.
Section I
Total Time: 1 hour 45 minutes
Percent of Total Score: 60%
Part A:
Part B:
Multiple-Choice questions
Short-Answer questions
Number of Questions: 55*
Time: 55 minutes
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Number of Questions: 4
Time: 50 minutes
Writing Instrument: Pen
with black or dark blue ink
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Section II Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes
Number of Questions: Documentbased question (DBQ) and 1 essay
(15-minute reading period, 75-minute
writing period)
Percent of Total Score: 40%
Writing Instrument: Pen with
black or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
• Exam packets
• Answer sheets
• Short-Answer Booklet
Return Envelope(s)
• AP Student Packs
• 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
• This book — AP Exam Instructions
• AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
• School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
SEATING POLICY FOR AP UNITED STATES HISTORY EXAM
Testing Window
Exams Administered at Schools in the
United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, and
the U.S. Virgin Islands
Regularly Scheduled
Exams
Students must be seated no less than
four feet apart.
Late-Testing Exams
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
280
Exams Administered at Schools Outside
the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico,
and the U.S. Virgin Islands
Students must be seated no less than
five feet apart.
AP Exam Instructions
SECTION I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
!General
Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Friday morning, May 6, and you will be taking the AP United States
History Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday morning, May 18, and you will be taking the AP United States
History Exam.
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your Section I:
Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of
your answer sheet on the light blue box near the top right-hand corner that
reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of the booklet and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read the instructions. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
Section I has two parts: Part A (multiple choice) and Part B (short answer). You
may never discuss these specific multiple-choice questions at any time in any
281
UNITED STATES HISTORY
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
two Section I booklets. One is labeled Section I: Multiple Choice and Short
Answer, and the other is labeled Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet. Do
not open the Part B: Short Answer Booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Place the Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet and the seals on
top of the shrinkwrapped Section II exam materials, and set these aside on
your desk. You should now refer only to the Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer booklet and your answer sheet. . . .
United States History
form with anyone, including your teacher and other students. If you disclose
these questions through any means, your AP Exam score will be canceled.
Put all pens aside. Open your answer sheet to page 2. The answer sheet
has circles marked A–E for each question. For U.S. History, you will use only
the circles marked A–D. You must complete the answer sheet using a No. 2
pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning on page 2 of your answer
sheet, one response per question. Completely fill in the circles. If you need
to erase, do so carefully and completely. No credit will be given for anything
written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is not allowed, but you may use
the margins or any blank space in the exam booklet for scratch work. Are
there any questions? . . .
You have 55 minutes for the multiple-choice questions. If you finish before time
is called, you may check your work, but do not go on to Part B until I tell you to
do so. Your answer sheets will be collected at the end of the 55 minutes. Open
your booklet labeled Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Proctors should circulate
throughout the testing room to check that students are marking their answers in pencil on
their answer sheets and that they are not looking ahead to Part B or at the other exam booklets.
Proctors should stop any students who begin reading the Part B short-answer questions or
begin writing in the Part B: Short Answer Booklet (this booklet should remain on top of the
Section II shrinkwrapped packet). These students should be redirected back to the multiplechoice questions. If students complete the multiple-choice questions early they may recheck
their work on Part A or sit quietly until you give the next instruction. After 45 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your exam booklet and put your answer sheet on your
desk, face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam
label on page 1 of your answer sheet.
Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets. Do not reopen the exam
booklet until you are told to do so.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now put all pencils aside. Get your Student Pack from under your chair, and
get the Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet that you set aside earlier.
Leave the seals and the shrinkwrapped Section II packet to the side. . . .
You should now have in front of you:
• Your Student Pack, and
• the two Section I booklets (the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short
Answer booklet and the Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet)
The Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet provides lined pages for your
responses. You must use a pen with black or dark blue ink so your responses
can be scored accurately.
282
AP Exam Instructions
Take an AP number label from the center of your Student Pack and place it
on the shaded box at the top of the first page of the short-answer booklet. If
you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in the box. . . .
Turn to the back page and using a pen with black or dark blue ink print the
first, middle, and last initials of your legal name in the boxes where indicated.
Then print your date of birth in the boxes where indicated. . . .
Then in the School Code box on the right, write the school code you printed
on the front of your Student Pack in the boxes, and fill in the corresponding
circles. . . .
Now read the statement in the top middle of the page. If you do not grant the
College Board permission to use your exam responses, you must fill in the
circle for “No, I do not grant the College Board these rights.”. . .
Place your Student Pack under your chair now. . . .
Part B of the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet contains
the short answer questions. You will write your responses in the shortanswer booklet. You must write your response to each question on the
lined page designated for the response to that question. Read the questions
carefully and respond to them concisely. Responses do not need to fill the
entire page. Longer responses will not necessarily receive higher scores
than shorter ones that accomplish all the tasks set by the question. Only
the responses on the designated pages of this booklet will be scored. Do
not write outside the box. You have 50 minutes for this part. Are there any
questions before we begin? . . .
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
writing their answers in their Section I, Part B: Short Answer Booklet within the boxes on the
lined pages designated for the questions. The booklet is designed to provide sufficient space for
responses. However, if a student requires additional space to complete responses, provide lined
paper. Instruct those students to write only their AP number, the exam section (Section I, Part B),
and the number of the question they are working on, at the top of each extra sheet of paper they
use. The shrinkwrapped Section II materials should still be on the side and unopened. After
40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close both booklets.
283
UNITED STATES HISTORY
Turn to Part B in the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet,
have the short-answer booklet face up in front of you, and begin working.
United States History
If any students used extra paper for a question in the short-answer part, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the page corresponding to that question in their short-answer
booklets. Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple
students per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the
required information is provided. Include all short-answer booklets with extra sheets of paper
in an Incident Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for
complete details). Then say:
I will now collect the short-answer booklet.
Collect a short-answer booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Short-answer booklet front: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box.
•• Short-answer booklet back: The student completed the identification information at the top.
Be sure to keep these short-answer booklets separate from the multiple-choice answer sheets.
Before leaving the testing room, you will need to insert all of the short-answer booklets inside the
yellow U.S. History short-answer booklet return envelope(s).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific short-answer questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way at
any time.
Now you must seal your Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet
using the white seals you set aside earlier. Remove the white seals from the
backing and press one on each area of your Section I: Multiple Choice and
Short Answer booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal
over the back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk,
face up. I will now collect your Section I: Multiple Choice and Short
Answer booklet. . . .
Collect the Section I: Multiple Choice and Short Answer booklet from each student. Check
that all booklets are sealed and that students have signed the front cover of the booklets. Recount
everything before dismissing students for the break.
There is a 10-minute break before beginning Section II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute break.
All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam must stay
there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any way. Leave
your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the break. You are
not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes, or textbooks during
the break. You may not make phone calls, send text messages, check email,
use a social networking site, or access any electronic or communication
device. Remember, you may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
284
AP Exam Instructions
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled. Remember, you may not discuss any shortanswer questions unless they are released on the College Board website in
about two days. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
Section II (free-response) of this exam begins with a mandatory essay question (Question 1) and
then gives students a choice of two essay topics (Question 2 or Question 3). A sheet of essaychoice labels is included with the Section II free-response booklets. At the conclusion of the
free-response section, you will instruct students to apply the appropriate label where indicated
on the front cover of their Section II exam booklet, identifying their essay choice.
After the break, say:
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do not
open either the Section II exam booklet or the orange Section II Free Response,
Questions and Documents booklet until you are told to do so. Put the
essay-choice labels aside. You will need them at the end of Section II. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete the identification
information as you did on the short-answer booklet.
Look up when you have finished. . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the Section II: Free Response
booklet. Do not open the booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
285
UNITED STATES HISTORY
Read the last statement. . . .
United States History
The total Section II time is 1 hour and 30 minutes. This includes a 15-minute
reading period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to
develop thoughtful, well-organized responses. During the reading period
you are advised to read Question 1 and plan your answer. If you have time,
you may also read Questions 2 and 3. You may begin writing your responses
before the reading period is over. You may make notes in the orange booklet,
but your responses must be written in the free-response booklet using a
pen with black or dark blue ink. At the top of each page in the free-response
booklet, circle the number of the question you are answering.
The suggested writing time for Question 1 is 40 minutes. After 40 minutes,
you will be advised to move on to the next question. Questions 2 and 3 are
weighted equally; you won’t get extra credit for answering the question
that may seem more difficult. Choose the question for which you are
better prepared.
If you need more paper to complete your responses, raise your hand. At the
top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number,
• Section II, and
• the question number you are working on.
You may now open the orange booklet and exam booklet and begin the
15-minute reading period.
12
9
3
6
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. After 15 minutes, say:
The reading period is over. You have 1 hour and 15 minutes remaining to
complete Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in their exam booklets and not in their orange
booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You are advised to move on to the next question. Answer either Question 2
or Question 3, but not both.
After 25 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close both booklets. Look at the bottom front cover of
your free-response booklet. Using the essay-choice labels that you set aside
earlier, select the label that matches the question you chose to answer
(Question 2 or Question 3), and apply it to the bottom front cover of your
exam booklet, where indicated. For example, if you answered Question 2
apply the label “2.” Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now put both booklets on your desk, face up. Do not place your Section II
exam booklet inside your orange booklet or vice versa. Put your unused labels
next to them. . . .
286
AP Exam Instructions
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students
per exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required
information is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident
Report return envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details).
Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials are collected. . . .
Collect a Section II booklet, an orange booklet, and the unused labels from each student. Check
for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label and an essay-choice
label in the appropriate boxes and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
•• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
You may discard the essay-choice labels after you have checked that all students applied one label
to each free-response booklet. When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for,
return to students any electronic devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
Before you leave the testing room, be sure to insert all of the Section I, Part B: Short Answer
Booklets inside the U.S. History short-answer booklet return envelope(s) with the folds of the
short-answer booklets facing the same direction. Insert no more than 25 short-answer booklets in
a single envelope. (Do not include multiple-choice answer sheets inside the short-answer booklet
return envelope(s).) If you use more than one envelope, number the envelopes consecutively
(1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3, etc.).
Do not tape or seal this envelope. Follow the directions on pages 66–67 of the 2015-16 AP
Coordinator’s Manual for packing the U.S. History short-answer booklet return envelope(s) in
your return shipment to the AP Program.
287
UNITED STATES HISTORY
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
United States History
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
IMPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam materials.
! This
applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These booklets are not to
be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When sorting exam materials
for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the Section II exam booklets. Do not
place Section II exam booklets inside the orange booklets or vice versa. The free-response
questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed unless the questions are
released on the College Board website two days after the exam.
288
AP® World History Exam
AP Exam Instructions
Regularly Scheduled Exam Date: Thursday morning, May 12, 2016
Late-Testing Exam Date: Wednesday afternoon, May 18, 2016
Section I Total Time: 55 min. Section II Total Time: 2 hr. 10 min.
Section I
Total Time: 55 minutes
Number of Questions: 70*
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pencil required
Section II Total Time: 2 hours 10 minutes
Number of Questions: 3 required essays
(DBQ, continuity/change-over-time essay,
and comparative essay)
(10-minute reading period, 120-minute writing
period)
*The number of questions may vary slightly
depending on the form of the exam.
Percent of Total Score: 50%
Writing Instrument: Pen with black
or dark blue ink
What Proctors Need to Bring to This Exam
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exam packets
Answer sheets
AP Student Packs
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual
This book — AP Exam Instructions
AP Exam Seating Chart template(s)
School Code and Home-School/SelfStudy Codes
• Pencil sharpener
• Container for students’ electronic
devices (if needed)
SECTION I: Multiple Choice
Do not begin the exam instructions below until you have completed the appropriate
General Instructions for your group.
Make sure you begin the exam at the designated time. Remember, you must complete a seating
chart for this exam. See pages 305–306 for a seating chart template and instructions. See the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for exam seating requirements (pages 49–52).
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
It is Thursday morning, May 12, and you will be taking the AP World
History Exam.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
It is Wednesday afternoon, May 18, and you will be taking the AP World
History Exam.
289
WORLD HISTORY
!
• Extra No. 2 pencils with erasers
• Extra pens with black or dark blue ink
• Lined paper
•Stapler
•Watch
• Signs for the door to the testing room
– “Exam in Progress”
– “Cell phones are prohibited in the
testing room”
World History
In a moment, you will open the packet that contains your exam materials.
By opening this packet, you agree to all of the AP Program’s policies and
procedures outlined in the 2015-16 Bulletin for AP Students and Parents. You
may now remove the shrinkwrap from your exam packet and take out the
Section I booklet, but do not open the booklet or the shrinkwrapped Section II
materials. Put the white seals aside. . . .
Carefully remove the AP Exam label found near the top left of your exam
booklet cover. Now place it on page 1 of your answer sheet on the light blue
box near the top right-hand corner that reads “AP Exam Label.”
If students accidentally place the exam label in the space for the number label or vice versa, advise
them to leave the labels in place. They should not try to remove the label; their exam can still be
processed correctly.
Read the statements on the front cover of Section I and look up when you
have finished. . . .
Sign your name and write today’s date. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Now print your full legal name where indicated. Are there any questions? . . .
Turn to the back cover of your exam booklet and read it completely. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
You will now take the multiple-choice portion of the exam. You should have
in front of you the multiple-choice booklet and your answer sheet. Open your
answer sheet to page 2. You may never discuss these specific multiple-choice
questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher and
other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your AP
Exam score will be canceled.
The answer sheet has circles marked A–E for each question. For World
History, you will use only the circles marked A–D. You must complete the
answer sheet using a No. 2 pencil only. Mark all of your responses beginning
on page 2 of your answer sheet, one response per question. Completely fill
in the circles. If you need to erase, do so carefully and completely. No credit
will be given for anything written in the exam booklet. Scratch paper is
not allowed, but you may use the margins or any blank space in the exam
booklet for scratch work. Are there any questions? . . .
You have 55 minutes for this section. Open your Section I booklet and begin.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
marking their answers in pencil on their answer sheets and that they are not looking at their
shrinkwrapped Section II materials. After 45 minutes, say:
9
3
6
There are 10 minutes remaining.
290
AP Exam Instructions
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working. Close your booklet and put your answer sheet on your desk,
face up. Make sure you have your AP number label and an AP Exam label on
page 1 of your answer sheet. Sit quietly while I collect your answer sheets.
Collect an answer sheet from each student. Check that each answer sheet has an AP number label
and an AP Exam label. After all answer sheets have been collected, say:
Now you must seal your exam booklet using the white seals you set aside
earlier. Remove the white seals from the backing and press one on each area of
your exam booklet cover marked “PLACE SEAL HERE.” Fold each seal over the
back cover. When you have finished, place the booklet on your desk, face up.
I will now collect your Section I booklet. . . .
Collect a Section I booklet from each student. Check that each student has signed the front cover
of the sealed Section I booklet.
There is a 10-minute break between Sections I and II. When all Section I materials have been
collected and accounted for and you are ready for the break, say:
Please listen carefully to these instructions before we take a 10-minute
break. All items you placed under your chair at the beginning of this exam
must stay there, and you are not permitted to open or access them in any
way. Leave your shrinkwrapped Section II packet on your desk during the
break. You are not allowed to consult teachers, other students, notes,
or textbooks during the break. You may not make phone calls, send text
messages, check email, use a social networking site, or access any electronic
or communication device. Remember, you may never discuss the multiplechoice questions at any time in any form with anyone, including your teacher
and other students. If you disclose these questions through any means, your
AP Exam score will be canceled. Are there any questions? . . .
12
9
6
3
You may begin your break. Testing will resume at
.
SECTION II: Free Response
May I have everyone’s attention? Place your Student Pack on your desk. . . .
You may now remove the shrinkwrap from the Section II packet, but do
not open either the Section II exam booklet or the orange Section II: Free
Response, Questions and Documents booklet until you are told to do so. . . .
Read the bulleted statements on the front cover of the exam booklet. Look
up when you have finished. . . .
Now take an AP number label from your Student Pack and place it on the
shaded box. If you don’t have any AP number labels, write your AP number in
the box. Look up when you have finished. . . .
291
WORLD HISTORY
After the break, say:
World History
Read the last statement. . . .
Using a pen with black or dark blue ink, print the first, middle, and last
initials of your legal name in the boxes and print today’s date where
indicated. This constitutes your signature and your agreement to the
statements on the front cover. . . .
Turn to the back cover and, using your pen, complete Item 1 under “Important
Identification Information.” Print the first two letters of your last name and the
first letter of your first name in the boxes. Look up when you have finished. . . .
In Item 2, print your date of birth in the boxes. . . .
In Item 3, write the school code you printed on the front of your Student
Pack in the boxes. . . .
Read Item 4. . . .
Are there any questions? . . .
I need to collect the Student Pack from anyone who will be taking another
AP Exam. You may keep it only if you are not taking any other AP Exams this
year. If you have no other AP Exams to take, place your Student Pack under
your chair now. . . .
Read the information on the back cover of the exam booklet. Do not open the
booklet until you are told to do so. Look up when you have finished. . . .
Collect the Student Packs. Then say:
Are there any questions? . . .
Read the information on the front cover of the orange booklet. Look up when
you have finished. . . .
The total Section II time is 2 hours and 10 minutes. This includes a 10-minute
reading period. The reading period is designed to provide you with time to
develop thoughtful, well-organized responses. You are advised to spend the
10-minute period reading the question and planning your answer to Part A,
Question 1, the document-based question (DBQ). If you have time, you may
also read the questions in Parts B and C. You may begin writing your exam
responses before the reading period is over. You may make notes in the orange
booklet, but your responses must be written in the free-response booklet
using a pen with black or dark blue ink. Write the number of the question you
are working on in the box at the top of each page in the free-response booklet.
The suggested writing time for Part A is 40 minutes. After 40 minutes, you
will be advised to move on to Part B and then 40 minutes later to move on to
Part C.
If you need more paper to complete your responses, raise your hand. At the
top of each extra sheet of paper you use, be sure to write only:
• your AP number, and
• the question number you are working on.
292
AP Exam Instructions
You may now open the orange booklet and exam booklet and begin the
10-minute reading period.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
writing any notes in the orange booklet. After 10 minutes, say:
9
3
6
. Check that students are
The reading period is over. You have 2 hours remaining to complete Section II.
12
Note Start Time here
. Note Stop Time here
. Check that students are
using pens and that they are writing their answers in their exam booklets and not in their orange
booklets. After 40 minutes, say:
9
3
6
You should now move on to Part B.
After 40 minutes, say:
You should begin working on Part C. You will need the remaining 40 minutes
to complete your last essay.
After 30 minutes, say:
There are 10 minutes remaining.
After 10 minutes, say:
Stop working and close your exam booklet and orange booklet. Put your
exam booklet on your desk, face up. Put your orange booklet next to it.
Do not place your Section II exam booklet inside your orange booklet or
vice versa. . . .
If any students used extra paper for a question in the free-response section, have those students
staple the extra sheet(s) to the first page corresponding to that question in their exam booklets.
Complete an Incident Report. A single Incident Report may be completed for multiple students per
exam subject per administration (regular or late testing) as long as all of the required information
is provided. Include all exam booklets with extra sheets of paper in an Incident Report return
envelope (see page 60 of the 2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual for complete details). Then say:
Remain in your seat, without talking, while the exam materials
are collected. . . .
When all exam materials have been collected and accounted for, return to students any electronic
devices you may have collected before the start of the exam.
293
WORLD HISTORY
Collect a Section II booklet and an orange booklet from each student. Check for the following:
•• Exam booklet front cover: The student placed an AP number label on the shaded box
and printed his or her initials and today’s date.
•• Exam booklet back cover: The student completed the “Important Identification
Information” area.
•• The student wrote answers in the Section II exam booklet and not in the orange booklet.
World History
If you are giving the regularly scheduled exam, say:
You may not discuss or share these specific free-response questions with anyone
unless they are released on the College Board website in about two days. Your AP
Exam score results will be available online in July.
If you are giving the alternate exam for late testing, say:
None of the questions in this exam may ever be discussed or shared in any way
at any time. Your AP Exam score results will be available online in July.
If any students completed the AP number card at the beginning of this exam, say:
Please remember to take your AP number card with you. You will need the
information on this card to view your scores and order AP score reporting
services online.
Then say:
You are now dismissed.
All exam materials must be placed in secure storage until they are returned to the AP Program
after your school’s last administration. Before storing materials, check the “School Use Only”
section on page 1 of the answer sheet and:
•• Fill in the appropriate section number circle in order to access a separate AP
Instructional Planning Report (for regularly scheduled exams only) or subject
score roster at the class section or teacher level. See “Post-Exam Activities” in the
2015-16 AP Coordinator’s Manual.
•• Check your list of students who are eligible for fee reductions and fill in the
appropriate circle on their registration answer sheets.
Be sure to give the completed seating chart to the AP Coordinator. Schools must retain seating
charts for at least six months (unless the state or district requires that they be retained for a longer
period of time). Schools should not return any seating charts in their exam shipments unless they
are required as part of an Incident Report.
MPORTANT: The orange booklets must be returned with the rest of your exam materials.
! IThis
applies to all exam administrations, including late testing. These booklets are not to
be kept at the school, or returned to students or teachers. When sorting exam materials
for return, keep the orange booklets separate from the Section II exam booklets. Do not
place Section II exam booklets inside the orange booklets or vice versa. The free-response
questions for the regularly scheduled exam may not be discussed unless the questions are
released on the College Board website two days after the exam.
294
AP Exam Instructions
Administration Incidents
YOU MUST COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
Defective materials
Multiple-choice booklet
If you have extra exams in the subject, provide
the student with the multiple-choice booklet from
an unused packet. Use the extra exam booklet
seals from the Coordinator’s Packet to secure the
incomplete exam packet, and return it with all
other exams.
If you have no extra exams available, call AP
Services for Educators immediately.
Free-response booklet
or orange booklet
If you have extra exams in the subject, provide the
student with the free-response booklet or orange
booklet from an unused packet. Use the extra exam
booklet seals from the Coordinator's Packet to
secure the incomplete exam packet, and return it
with all other exams.
If you have no extra exams available, call AP
Services for Educators immediately.
Master audio CDs
Call AP Services for Educators immediately.
On the IR, grid Defective Materials and Multiple
Choice. Identify the nature of the defect, including
the page number where the defect was found.
Include defective materials with the IR and return
them in the IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
On the IR, grid Defective Materials and Free
Response. Identify the nature of the defect,
including the page number where the defect was
found. Include defective materials with the IR and
return them in the IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services, note the AP Services Case
Number on the IR.
On the IR, grid Defective Materials and Master
Audio CDs. Identify the nature of the defect and the
actions you took to resolve the problem. Include
defective materials with the IR and return them in
the IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
Student-response tapes
or CDs
If you have extra student-response CDs or tapes for
that subject and form, use them.
Alternatively, use a replacement tape or blank CD-R
data disc that has the following information:
ᎰᎰ AP number label affixed or written on the tape/CD
ᎰᎰ Exam subject
On the IR, grid Defective Materials and StudentResponse CD or Tape. If you use your own
replacement CDs or tapes, also grid Used SchoolSupplied Replacement Tape/CD. Identify the defect
and the actions you took to resolve the problem.
Do not return the defective item to AP Services
for Educators.
ᎰᎰ Form code
ᎰᎰ Administration date and time
Missing exam materials
Missing master CDs or
exams on CD
Call the Office of Testing Integrity (OTI) immediately
for instructions if you discover that master audio
CDs for the exams for French, German, Italian, or
Spanish Language and Culture or Music Theory or
Chinese and Japanese Exams on CD are missing.
You must not administer exams in the affected
subjects until receiving instructions from OTI.
On the IR, grid Missing Exam Materials. Identify
the missing materials and the actions you took
to resolve the problem. Include the IR in the
IR return envelope.
Missing exam packet,
multiple-choice, shortanswer, free-response
booklet, or orange
booklet
Call the Office of Testing Integrity (OTI) immediately
for instructions. You must not administer exams
in the affected subjects until receiving instructions
from OTI.
On the IR, grid Missing Exam Materials. Identify
the missing materials and the actions you took
to resolve the problem. Include the IR in the
IR return envelope.
Disturbance
If possible, reduce or eliminate the source of the
disturbance (loud noise, excessive heat/cold, etc.).
Uninterrupted exam
Complete an IR as instructed by the Office of
Testing Integrity.
Complete an IR as instructed by the Office of
Testing Integrity.
Tell students that an appropriate message
such as “School reports distraction during the
administration of the exam” may appear on their
score reports.
295
On the IR, grid Disturbance. Report the nature of
the disturbance and the section affected. Report
only severe disturbances on the IR, unless there
are many student complaints. Include the IR and
seating chart in the IR return envelope.
Administration Incidents
YOU MUST COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Interruption
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
Provide clear instructions for the safety of the
students if a fire drill, power failure, etc. occurs.
Note the time; ask students to close their exam
booklets and leave them on their desks. Direct
students not to talk and not to access prohibited
items, and monitor them at all times if they must
leave the testing room.
Please be aware that proper monitoring during an
interruption requires that students were never left
unattended and were closely monitored at all times
to prevent discussion of test questions, access to
unauthorized aids, and usage of mobile phones and
other electronic devices. Failure to adhere to this
policy may result in cancellation of scores.
On the IR, grid Interruption. Note the affected
section(s); report the source, length, and impact
of the interruption, and the corrective action taken
(including time adjustments). Include the IR and
seating chart and all affected exam materials in the
IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
If it is possible to return to the exam room in a
reasonable amount of time (as in the case of a
fire drill), and you are certain all students were
monitored properly during the entire time testing
was stopped, follow procedures to resume each
exam and allow students to continue testing.
Call AP Services for Educators immediately if testing
cannot be resumed.
Equipment problems
Group incident
French, German, Italian,
and Spanish Language
and Culture
If the equipment problem involves the Master
Listening CD and/or the Master Persuasive Essay CD:
Retest the students immediately. Report even if
retesting occurs before dismissal.
If retesting is not possible before dismissal, contact AP
Services for Educators immediately for instructions.
If the equipment problem isn’t discovered until after
students are dismissed, do not retest until you have
contacted AP Services for Educators.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
affected parts or sections, and explain the nature of
the equipment problem and, if applicable, whether
any portions of the recorded speaking responses
are missing.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
If the equipment problem involves the Master
Speaking CD:
Ask students affected to close their booklets.
Remove these students from the room to a secure,
monitored area and have them sit quietly without
accessing any unauthorized aids until the end of the
session. Do not stop any of the equipment being
used by other students. Retest at the conclusion of
the session, if possible.
Report even if retesting occurs before dismissal. If
the equipment problem isn’t discovered until after
students are dismissed, do not retest until you have
contacted AP Services for Educators.
Group incident
Spanish Literature and
Culture
Individual incident
French, German, Italian,
and Spanish Language
and Culture
Individual incident
Music Theory
Retest the students immediately. Report even if
retesting occurs before dismissal.
If retesting is not possible before dismissal, contact AP
Services for Educators immediately for instructions.
If the equipment problem isn’t discovered until after
students are dismissed, do not retest until you have
contacted AP Services for Educators.
Do not stop any of the equipment being used by
other students. Retest the student immediately.
Do not report if retesting occurs before dismissal.
If retesting is not possible before dismissal, contact AP
Services for Educators immediately for instructions.
If the equipment problem isn’t discovered until after
students are dismissed, do not retest until you have
contacted AP Services for Educators.
Retest the student immediately. Do not report if
retesting occurs before dismissal.
If the equipment problem isn’t discovered until after
students are dismissed, do not retest until you have
contacted AP Services for Educators.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
affected parts or sections, and explain the nature of
the equipment problem.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
To report: On the IR, grid Equipment Problems.
Note the student’s name and AP number in the
space provided at the bottom of the page. Note
the affected sections, and explain the nature of the
equipment problem and whether any portions of
the recorded speaking responses are missing.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
To report: On the IR, grid Equipment Problems.
Note the student’s name and AP number in the
space provided at the bottom of the page. Note
the affected sections, and explain the nature of the
equipment problem and whether any portions of
the recorded sight-singing responses are missing.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
296
AP Exam Instructions
YOU MUST COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
Illness during the exam
Student unable to return
Contact AP Services for Educators as soon as possible
to order a full or partial alternate exam, as appropriate.
Advise the student that unless a full or partial
alternate exam is taken or cancellation is requested, a
score will be reported based on what was completed.
Make sure that the student’s AP number appears on
all exam sections and the answer sheet.
On the IR, grid Illness. Note the student’s name and
AP number in the space provided at the bottom of
the page. Return the student’s exam materials with
the IR in the IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the AP
Services Case Number on the IR.
Misconduct
Disruptive behavior
You have the authority to dismiss a student for
misconduct. If a student’s behavior during the exam
disturbs others (e.g., the student exhibits rude,
belligerent, or disruptive behavior), warn the student
that he or she will be dismissed if the disruptive
behavior persists. Isolate the offender, if necessary, in
a minimally disturbing way. You may dismiss anyone
who continues to be disruptive. Take steps to ensure
dismissed students are not provided the opportunity
to transmit information about the exam to other
students. Inform the student that a report will be sent
to AP Services for Educators.
On the IR, grid Misconduct, and if necessary,
Student Dismissed. Note the student’s name and
AP number in the space provided at the bottom
of the page. Describe all events in detail, even if
you do not dismiss the student. If other students
complained about the disturbance, document their
names and complaints. Explain the situation, length
of disturbance, and affected section(s).
Include the student’s exam materials with the IR and
seating chart and return in the IR return envelope.
In certain cases, you may be reluctant to dismiss
a student for fear of embarrassment, disturbance
to other examinees, or physical reprisal. You
should dismiss when warranted, but use your own
judgment in handling each situation.
Student leaving the
designated break area
or building without
permission
Collect the student’s exam materials and ensure that
no exam materials are missing before immediately
dismissing the student if the student is still present.
Do not readmit the student to the testing room.
On the IR, grid Misconduct and Student Dismissed.
Note the student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Describe all
events in detail.
Using electronic
equipment (cell phone,
smartphone,
smartwatch, laptop,
tablet computer, etc.),
portable listening or
recording devices
(MP3 player, iPod,
etc.), cameras or other
photographic equipment,
devices that can access
the Internet, or any
other electronic or
communication device
during testing or during
a break
Confiscate the device and dismiss the student from
the testing room.
Review the device for calls, text messages, and
pictures to determine if there was a breach in
security. If anything suspicious is detected, contact
the Office of Testing Integrity for further instructions.
Prohibited aid
Advise the student that failure to adhere to the testing
procedures after receiving a warning may result in
cancellation of scores and that you are required to
report the matter to AP Services for Educators.
Same as “Disruptive behavior.” If the prohibited aid
consists of notes, scratch paper, or both, retrieve
them from the student and attach them to the IR.
Copying
Change seating. Take no further action toward
dismissal until you are sure information has been
shared. Have an assistant witness any suspected
misconduct.
On the IR, grid Misconduct and, if necessary,
Student Dismissed. If individual, note the student’s
name and AP number in the space provided at the
bottom of the page. Describe specific circumstances,
including the exam section when the copying was
observed, and list the names and AP numbers of
those suspected (copier and person copied).
On the IR, grid Misconduct and Student Dismissed.
Note the student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Describe all
events in detail.
If the situation persists after a warning from you or
a proctor, collect exam materials and dismiss the
students involved, explaining that these actions are
necessitated by the students’ failure to abide by
testing regulations.
Giving or receiving
assistance of any kind
Advise the student(s) that failure to adhere to the
testing procedures after receiving a warning may
result in cancellation of scores and that you are
required to report the matter to AP Services for
Educators.
Include the affected exam materials with the IR and
seating chart and return in the IR return envelope.
On the IR, grid Misconduct. If individual, note
the student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Describe
specific circumstances, including the exam section
when the assistance was observed, and list the
names and AP numbers of those involved.
Include the affected exam materials with the IR and
seating chart and return in the IR return envelope.
297
Administration Incidents
YOU MUST COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Opening the exam
booklet before the start
of the particular section
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
Ask the student to close the exam booklet.
If student opened the Multiple Choice booklet prior to
the start of the Multiple Choice section: no action is
necessary other than filling out an IR.
If student opened the Free Response booklet prior to
the start of the Free Response section: immediately
collect the exam booklet. Call the Office of Testing
Integrity (OTI) immediately for instructions. Do not
allow the student to resume testing until you have
received instructions from OTI.
On the IR, grid Misconduct. Note the student’s name
and AP number in the space provided at the bottom
of the page. Describe all events in detail even if you
do not dismiss the student. Note the affected exam
and section.
Include the affected exam materials with the IR and
seating chart and return in the IR return envelope.
Tell the student that a report will be submitted.
Warn the student that a subsequent violation will be
grounds for dismissal from the exam.
Working on the wrong
section
Direct the student to the proper exam booklet. Tell
the student that a report will be submitted. Warn the
student that a subsequent violation will be grounds
for dismissal from the exam.
On the IR, grid Misconduct. Note the student’s name
and AP number in the space provided at the bottom
of the page. Describe all events in detail even if you
do not dismiss the student. Note the affected exam
and section.
Include the affected exam materials with the IR and
seating chart and return in the IR return envelope.
Misplaced answers
Answers marked in the
multiple-choice exam
booklet
Inform the student that credit will only be given for
answers marked on the AP answer sheet.
Answers in an orange
booklet instead of in the
free-response booklet
Inform the student that credit will only be given for
answers written in the free-response booklet.
Answers on the wrong
page of the freeresponse booklet or
short-answer booklet
Inform the student that the Readers will be directed
to the responses on the correct pages of the freeresponse booklet or short-answer booklet.
Answers misgridded on
the answer sheet
Under no circumstances should you transcribe
student responses on the correct area(s) of the
answer sheet.
On the IR, grid Misplaced Answers. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Provide as
much information as possible about the misgridded
answers (e.g., where the misgridding begins) and
include the answer sheet with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
If possible, correct the undertiming before students
are dismissed. You can correct the undertiming only
if it does not require students to go back and break
open the seals of part or all of the Section I booklet. If
successful, there is no need to report the incident.
If undertiming cannot be corrected or is discovered
after students have been dismissed, tell students
that a report will be submitted. On the IR, grid
Undertiming and note the number of minutes.
Report the sections affected and amount of
undertiming. If the undertiming is less than five
minutes, the exam may be processed as usual.
Include all affected exam materials with the IR and
return in the IR return envelope.
Under no circumstances should you transcribe
student responses on the answer sheet (unless the
student has an approved accommodation by the
College Board).
Under no circumstances should you transcribe
student responses on the correct page(s) of the freeresponse booklet (unless the student has an approved
accommodation by the College Board).
Under no circumstances should you transcribe
student responses on the correct page(s) of the freeresponse booklet or short-answer booklet (unless
the student has an approved accommodation by the
College Board).
On the IR, grid Misplaced Answers. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain the
situation and include the shrinkwrapped Section I
exam booklet and answer sheet with the IR and
return in the IR return envelope.
On the IR, grid Misplaced Answers. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain the
situation and include the Section II exam booklet
with the IR and return in the IR return envelope.
On the IR, grid Misplaced Answers. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain the
situation and include the exam booklet with the IR
and return in the IR return envelope.
Mistiming
Undertiming
However, any undertiming that cannot be corrected
or is discovered after students have been dismissed
must be reported. Contact AP Services for Educators
immediately.
Overtiming
Make no adjustment if too much time is allowed on
any section of the exam. Tell students that a report
will be filed and that overtiming may result in the
cancellation of students’ scores. Contact AP Services
for Educators immediately.
298
On the IR, grid Overtiming and note the number of
minutes. Report the sections affected and amount of
overtiming. Include all affected exam materials with
the IR and return in the IR return envelope.
AP Exam Instructions
YOU MUST COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Students shared same
AP number
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
Students must not share AP numbers. If you discover
the problem prior to the exam, call AP Services to
get AP numbers for the students. If you discover the
problem during the exam, have another proctor call
AP Services to get AP numbers for the students.
On the IR, grid Students Shared Same AP Number.
List all students who shared the same AP number.
Include all affected exam materials with the IR and
return in the IR return envelope.
However, if it is discovered after testing is complete,
submit an IR.
Student used ink on
answer sheet
Advise the student that the multiple-choice section
will have to be hand-scored, but scoring will not be
affected.
On the IR, grid Student Used Ink on Answer Sheet.
Note the student’s name and AP number in the
space provided at the bottom of the page. Include all
affected exam materials with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
Student used extra
paper
If students require additional space to complete their
responses, provide lined paper. They must print
only their AP number, the title of the exam, and the
question number at the top of each extra sheet of
paper. After the exam, have students staple the extra
paper to the page corresponding to that question.
On the IR, grid Student Used Extra Paper.
If only one student used extra paper: grid Individual
student incident and note the student’s name and
AP number in the space provided. Include the IR with
the short-answer and/or free-response booklet(s)
with extra paper stapled inside and return in the IR
return envelope.
If more than one student used extra paper, you
may submit a single IR per exam subject per
administration (regular or late testing): grid Group
incident and note the number of students involved
in the space provided. On a separate piece of paper,
provide the exam title, the school code(s), and the
names and AP numbers of all students who used
extra paper. Include the IR with the short-answer
and/or free-response booklets with extra paper
stapled inside and return in the IR return envelope.
Collect the student’s exam materials. Advise
the student that unless a score cancellation is
requested, his or her score will be reported based
on what was completed. A full or partial alternate
exam will not be offered.
On the IR, grid Other. Note the student’s name
and AP number in the space provided at the bottom
of the page. Explain the event and indicate time
away from the exam room. Include the affected
exam materials with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
Administering an exam
at the wrong time or on
the wrong date
Call the Office of Testing Integrity (OTI) immediately
for instructions if you discover that you administered
an exam at the wrong time or on the wrong date. You
must not order a replacement exam(s) until receiving
instructions from OTI.
On the IR, grid Testing Off-Schedule. Identify the
exam administered at the wrong time or on the
wrong date, and the actions you took immediately
following the discovery. Complete an IR as
instructed by the Office of Testing Integrity.
Administering the wrong
exam
Call the Office of Testing Integrity (OTI) immediately
for instructions if you discover that the wrong exam
was given to a student(s). You must not administer
the exam distributed in error to any student(s)
or order a replacement exam(s) until receiving
instructions from OTI.
On the IR, grid Testing Off-Schedule. Identify the
wrong exam that was given to the student(s) and
the actions you took immediately following the
discovery. Complete an IR as instructed by the
Office of Testing Integrity. Include the IR in the
IR return envelope.
Unscheduled departure
from the testing site
Testing Off-Schedule
ADMINISTRATION INCIDENTS INVOLVING CHINESE AND JAPANESE EXAMS ON CD ONLY
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Incidents
Procedure in Testing Room
Defective exams on CD
Call AP Services for Educators immediately.
On the IR, grid Defective Materials and Chinese
and Japanese Exams on CD. Identify the nature of
the defect and the actions you took to resolve the
problem. Include defective materials with the IR
and return in the IR return envelope with all other
materials.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the
AP Services Case Number on the IR.
Missing exams on CD
Call the Office of Testing Integrity (OTI) immediately
for instructions if you discover that Chinese or
Japanese Exams on CD are missing. You must not
administer exams in the affected subjects until
receiving instructions from OTI.
299
On the IR, grid Missing Exam Materials. Identify
the missing materials and the actions you took
to resolve the problem. Include the IR in the
IR return envelope.
Complete an IR as instructed by the Office of
Testing Integrity.
Administration Incidents
ADMINISTRATION INCIDENTS INVOLVING CHINESE AND JAPANESE EXAMS ON CD ONLY
Incidents
Software or hardware
problems
Exam will not launch:
student has difficulty
moving from question
to question; warning
messages appear on
the screen; keyboard is
locked; monitor goes
dark; equipment failure,
etc.
Incident Report Information/
Other Action
Procedure in Testing Room
If there is a delay in starting an exam or an
interruption during a student’s exam and the exam
cannot be completed, ask the student to leave the
testing room and wait for further instructions.
Call Technical Support immediately.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain the
nature of the problem and whether Technical
Support was able to help. If the exam cannot be
restarted, and no other computer is available,
contact AP Services to order late-testing exams.
Include affected exam materials with the IR and
return in the IR return envelope. After calling AP
Services, note the AP Services Case Number on
the IR.
Exam stops and restart
is necessary
Restart the exam; it will resume from the last
question the student was working on.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain
the nature of the problem. Include affected
exam materials with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
Power outage
Keep students monitored and quiet until power is
restored, and resume testing.
Power goes out in the
testing site or at a single
workstation — power
immediately restored.
If power is immediately restored, the proctor must
restart each student’s exam. To restart an exam,
reinsert the CD, enter the same AP name and
number of the student testing at that computer, and
follow the instructions on the screens to relaunch
the exam. The exam will resume from where the
exam stopped.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain
the nature of the problem. Include affected
exam materials with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
Power goes out in
the testing site or at a
single workstation —
power not immediately
restored.
If the power is not immediately restored, power
off each workstation and other equipment until the
power is again available.
If testing cannot be resumed, contact AP Services
for Educators to order late-testing exams.
On the IR, grid Equipment Problems. Note the
student’s name and AP number in the space
provided at the bottom of the page. Explain the
nature of the problem. Contact AP Services to
order late-testing materials. Include affected
exam materials with the IR and return in the
IR return envelope.
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the
AP Services Case Number on the IR.
Unscheduled departure
from the testing site
Collect student’s scratch paper. Terminate the
exam by using the administrator override; choose
the option to end the exam. You will be prompted
to ensure that the exam responses are either
uploaded over the Internet or copied to the USB
drive provided by the AP Program.
On the IR, grid Other. Note the student’s name
and AP number in the space provided at the
bottom of the page. Explain the event. Include
affected exam materials with the IR and return
in the IR return envelope.
Emergencies
In an emergency, the primary concern should
be the safety of everyone present. If necessary,
evacuate everyone immediately.
On the IR, grid Interruption. Note the affected
section(s); report the source, length, and impact
of the interruption, and the corrective action
taken (including time adjustments). Include
the IR and seating chart and all affected exam
materials in the IR return envelope.
Storms, floods, fires,
fire drills, bomb
scares, or other
unusual activities
that disrupt exam
administration and
are beyond the
control of testing site
staff
ᎰᎰ If there is sufficient time, interrupt the exam
by ejecting the Exam CD.
ᎰᎰ Lock the testing room door after everyone
has exited.
If the CDs were ejected, and it is possible to
return to the exam room in a reasonable amount
of time (as in the case of a fire drill), and you are
certain all students were monitored properly
during the entire time testing was stopped,
follow procedures to resume each exam and
allow students to continue testing. If you
are unable to resume the exam, follow the
procedure on page 115 of the 2015-16 AP
Coordinator’s Manual for terminating
an interrupted exam.
Please be aware that proper monitoring during
an interruption requires that students were never
left unattended and were closely monitored at
all times to prevent discussion of test questions,
access to unauthorized aids, and usage of mobile
phones and other electronic devices. Failure to
adhere to this policy may result in cancellation
of scores.
Call AP Services for Educators immediately if
testing cannot be resumed.
300
After calling AP Services for Educators, note the
AP Services Case Number on the IR.
AP Exam Instructions
DO NOT COMPLETE AN INCIDENT REPORT FOR THE FOLLOWING
Incidents
Procedure in Testing Room
Other Action
No IR needed. Order alternate exam
materials online.
Illness Day of exam
Student unable
to test
The student should submit a written
statement from a doctor or parent
verifying illness. Keep the document in
your files for 60 days.
Insufficient answer
sheets
Photocopy answer sheets for students to enter responses.
No IR needed.
Insufficient AP
Student Packs
If you discover the problem prior to the exam, call AP Services
for Educators.
No IR needed.
If you discover the problem during the exam, have another
proctor call AP Services for Educators to get an AP number for
each of the students requiring an AP number.
Student without
AP Student Pack
who knows his or
her AP number
Instruct student to write his or her AP number on the
answer sheet.
No IR needed.
Student without
AP Student Pack
who does not
know his or her
AP number
If this is the first AP Exam the student is taking this year, provide
the student with a new AP Student Pack. Instruct the student
to use the AP number from the Student Pack he or she was just
provided for all AP Exams he or she takes this year.
No IR needed.
Exam
cancellation—
Group
If a storm, flood, power failure, or other event necessitates
the cancellation of the exam, call AP Services for
Educators immediately.
If this is not the first AP Exam the student has taken this year,
leave the AP number field blank.
File IR only if instructed by AP Services
for Educators.
Student should fill out Score Cancellation
Form and return it to AP Services
for Educators.
Score
cancellation—
Individual
Latecomers
If a latecomer arrives to the exam room before the other exam
takers have finished filling out the identification information on
their answer sheets, and the school considers the cause of the
student’s late arrival to be beyond the student’s control, the
latecomer may be admitted and tested.
No IR needed.
Sealing answer
sheet inside
multiple-choice
exam booklet
Open the booklet, remove the answer sheet, and reseal it using
extra seals from the Coordinator’s Packet.
No IR needed.
Student declines
use of calculator
Student hand writes, signs, and dates release statement
appropriate to exam.
Place signed release statement in the
IR return envelope.
Exam question
ambiguities and
errors
Instruct student to answer the question to the best of his or
her ability.
No IR needed.
Student neglects
to complete survey
questions
Tell student no action is necessary.
If student feels that a question has an error or is unclear, advise
student to fill out the AP Exam Question Ambiguity and Error
Form on the AP Students website and to follow the directions
there for sending it to AP Assessment Development.
No IR needed.
Note discrepancy on Packing List and
explain circumstances when generating
your invoice.
Discrepancies in
exam materials
being returned
Pencil or
inappropriate
ink color on freeresponse section
Advise student that scoring of the free-response section will not
be affected.
No IR needed.
Student did not
sign answer sheet
No action is necessary.
No IR needed.
AP number label or
AP Exam label was
placed in wrong
area
This will not impact the scoring of the answer document or
Section II booklet.
No IR needed.
No action is necessary.
301
Photocopy this form before use or download this form from www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
IR page
of School Code: 2016 AP Coordinator’s
Incident Report (IR) Form
®
Date of Report: School Name:
City: State: ZIP/Postal Code:
Country:
AP Coordinator Contact Information
Signature:
Name (please print):
Summer Phone Number: (
Email:
)
Exam Information (Please print)
Exam Form (Please print)
Exam Title:
The form information appears in the lower right-hand corner of the
multiple-choice and free-response booklets. Please include the form
(e.g., Form O, A, I, etc.) and the form code (e.g., Form 4MBP).
Exam Code:
Exam Section:
Form:
Exam Date:
Form Code:
Type of Incident (Grid all that apply and explain the events in detail below)
Defective Materials (Grid all that apply)
Multiple Choice
Free Response
Master Audio CDs
Student Response CD or Tape
Chinese and Japanese Exams on CD
Equipment Problems
Used School-Supplied Replacement Tape/CD
Misplaced Answers
Illness
Missing Exam Materials
Misconduct
Student Dismissed
Overtiming — Number of Minutes:__________________
Undertiming — Number of Minutes:_________________
Interruption — Number of Minutes:__________________
Disturbance — Number of Minutes:__________________
Student Shared Same AP Number
Student Used Ink on Answer Sheet
Student Used Extra Paper
Student Used Cell Phone/Prohibited Device or It Made
Noise
Student Removed/Attempted to Remove Exam
Materials
Testing Off-Schedule
Other
Was AP Services for Educators
contacted?
yes
no
AP Services Case Number:____________________________
Has an alternate exam been ordered?
yes
no
Did the incident compromise the student’s ability to test
enough to require late testing?
yes
no
Individual student incident — Complete the following:
Student’s Name: Student’s AP Number:
Group incident — On a separate piece of paper, provide the exam title, the school code(s), and the names and
AP numbers of all students involved.
Number of Students Involved:
REQUIRED: Incident Detail — Explanation (Describe all events and actions taken on next page)
FRB
SR
MCB
OB
ETS USE ONLY
ML
MS
C/J
303
DATE
INITIALS
Photocopy this form before use or download this form from www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
IR page
of School Code: Exam Title: 2016 AP Coordinator’s
Incident Report (IR) Form
®
Incident Detail
REQUIRED: Incident Detail — Explanation (Describe all events and actions taken):
304
AP Exam Seating Chart
(Directions and Sample)
®
AP Coordinator or proctor: Complete the chart on the next page for every testing room used during each subject’s exam
administration and retain it for at least six months. (Your state or district may require you to retain seating charts for
a longer period of time.) Having seating charts on file will help expedite an investigation of a reported incident should
one occur.
Refer to the sample on this page to construct the seating chart. Use the diagram on the next page to indicate how exam
booklets were distributed in your testing room.
Note: Seating charts should not be returned in the exam shipment unless they are required as part of an Incident Report.
In this case, the chart should be included with the Incident Report in the IR Return envelope and placed in the first carton
(carton 1 of X) returned to AP Services.
1.For
large rooms, use a separate form for each area of the
room and indicate, in words and with arrows, where areas
adjoin each other.
 6.Draw
the top of the chart, indicate the AP Exam, room
number, and school code. Beside the room number,
indicate whether this is a complete room or a section of a
larger room by specifying the section (i.e., A, B, C).
 7. Write
2.At
the position of the proctor’s desk or table if it is
not at the front of the room.
a large X to cross out any unused area outside the
boundary. Draw a small X through any unused seats
within the boundary.
the full name of the student or the 11-digit serial
number of the exam booklet assigned to each occupied
seat, e.g., S0002161811.
 8.For
each row, draw directional arrows to indicate the
direction in which the booklets were distributed.
3.Indicate
4.Indicate
the location of the entrance doors.
 9.Print
10. The
your name and the date where indicated.
completed seating chart must be returned to the AP
Coordinator and retained for six months. Keep a copy of
any seating chart that is returned to AP Services in your
exam shipment.
5.Draw
a line around the group of seats occupied in the
room or in your assigned area.
e
l
p
m
a
S
305
306
Name of person completing this diagram (please print)
AP Proctor or
Coordinator’s Desk
Rear
Date
Front (students face this direction)
AP® Exam: ___________________________________________ Room: __________________ School Code: ___________________________
Photocopy this form before use or download this form from www.collegeboard.org/apcoordinator.
2016 Late Testing Schedule
This 2016 late-testing schedule contains boxes for your use in tallying the number of
alternate exams you give in each subject. You may also wish to photocopy this schedule
and distribute it to your proctors and teachers.
Friday, May 20
Thursday, May 19
Wednesday, May 18
Day
Morning
8 a.m.
Afternoon
12 p.m.
German Language
and Culture
Comparative
Government and Politics
Macroeconomics
English Language
and Composition
Music Theory
Environmental Science
Statistics
French Language
and Culture
United States
Government and Politics
Microeconomics
United States History
World History
Art History
Chemistry
Calculus AB
Chinese Language
and Culture
Calculus BC
European History
Computer Science A
Physics 1:
Algebra-Based
Human Geography
Spanish Language
and Culture
English Literature
and Composition
Biology
Italian Language
and Culture
Latin
Japanese Language
and Culture
Physics C: Mechanics
Physics 2:
Algebra-Based
Seminar
Psychology
Spanish Literature
and Culture
Afternoon
2 p.m.
Physics C: Electricity
and Magnetism
Please note:
• Schools must begin the morning exam administration between 8 and 9 a.m. local time and the afternoon exam
administration between 12 and 1 p.m. local time. The AP Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism Exam must begin
between 2 and 3 p.m. local time. Schools in Alaska must begin the morning exam administration between 7 and
8 a.m. local time and the afternoon exam administration between 11 a.m. and 12 p.m. local time. The AP Physics C:
Electricity and Magnetism Exam in Alaska must begin between 1 and 2 p.m. local time.
• Coordinators are responsible for notifying students when and where to report for the exams. Early testing or testing
at times other than those published by the College Board is not permitted under any circumstances.
• AP Seminar End-of-Course Exams are only available to students at schools participating in the AP Capstone program.
Students participating in AP Capstone must submit all final AP Seminar and AP Research performance assessment
tasks, and those tasks must be scored by AP Seminar and AP Research teachers by April 30.
2016 AP Exam Schedule
®
This 2016 exam schedule contains boxes for your use in tallying the number of exams you give in each subject.
You may also wish to photocopy this schedule and distribute it to your p
­ roctors and teachers.
Morning
8 a.m. Local Time
Afternoon
12 p.m. Local Time
Monday,
May 2
Chemistry
Psychology
Tuesday,
May 3
Computer Science A
Art History
Spanish Language and
Culture
Physics 1: Algebra-Based
English Literature and
Composition
Japanese Language and Culture
Week 1
Wednesday,
May 4
Environmental Science
Physics 2: Algebra-Based
Thursday,
May 5
Calculus AB
Chinese Language and Culture
Calculus BC
Seminar
Friday,
May 6
German Language
and Culture
European History
United States History
Studio Art — Last day for Coordinators to submit digital portfolios (by 8 p.m. EDT) and to gather
2-D Design and Drawing students for physical portfolio assembly. Teachers should have forwarded
students’ completed digital portfolios to Coordinators before this date.
Week 2
Monday,
May 9
Morning
8 a.m. Local Time
Afternoon
12 p.m. Local Time
Afternoon
2 p.m. Local Time
Biology
Physics C: Mechanics
Physics C: Electricity
and Magnetism
Music Theory
Tuesday,
May 10
United States
Government and Politics
French Language
and Culture
Spanish Literature
and Culture
Wednesday,
May 11
English Language
and Composition
Italian Language
and Culture
Macroeconomics
Thursday,
May 12
Comparative Government
and Politics
Statistics
World History
Friday,
May 13
Human Geography
Latin
Microeconomics
Please note:
ᎰᎰ Schools must begin the morning exam administration between 8 and 9 a.m. local time and the afternoon exam administration
between 12 and 1 p.m. local time. The AP Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism Exam must begin between 2 and 3 p.m. local
time. Schools in Alaska must begin the morning exam administration between 7 and 8 a.m. local time and the afternoon exam
administration between 11 a.m. and 12 p.m. local time. The AP Physics C: Electricity and Magnetism Exam in Alaska must begin
between 1 and 2 p.m. local time.
ᎰᎰ AP Coordinators are responsible for notifying students when and where to report for the exams. Early testing or testing at times
other than those published by the College Board is not permitted under any circumstances.
ᎰᎰ AP Coordinators should order late-testing exams for students who would like to take exams that are scheduled for the same time.
™
ᎰᎰ AP Seminar End-of-Course Exams are only available to students at schools participating in the AP Capstone program. Students
participating in AP Capstone must submit all final AP Seminar and AP Research performance assessment tasks, and those tasks
must be scored by AP Seminar and AP Research teachers by April 30.
785211
00140-040a
108333-034739 • unlweb-ACC216
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising